PDF Mitel Mail Fax Memo

Mitel Mail Fax Memo R2 Mitel Mail Fax Memo R2

User Manual: PDF T E X T F I L E S

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 329

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

Issue 1 Release 2.0 January 1996

Voice

Processina

TM, @-Trademark of Mite1Corporation
0 Copyright 1996, Mite1Corporation
All rights reserved.
Printed in Canada.

FaxMemo
Manual

Solutjons

Table
About

of Contents
This Manual
Who Should Read This Manual ......................................................................

vii

...............................................................................
Reference Chapters ......................................................................................
Task Lists ....................................................................................................

vii

How to Use This Manual

Procedures

..................................................................................................

Menu Maps and Other Navigation Aids .....................................................
*,
Worksheets ...................................................................................................
Conventions

Used in This Manual

..................................................................

Reader Advisories ..............................................................................................
Before You Start ...............................................................................................

1 FaxMemo

Console Tips and Techniques

......................................................................

Preparing for a Configuration

Session ........................................................

Features

vii
vii
...

vlll

...

Ml1

ix
ix
X

xi
xi
...
xl11

and Functions

l-2
l-2
Fax Mail .....................................................................................................
l-3
Fax Broadcast .............................................................................................
l-3
Guaranteed Fax ..........................................................................................
l-3
Fax Publishing ............................................................................................
1-3
Walkaway Fax ............................................................................................
.................................................................
14
FaxMemo Flexible Configuration
14
Class of Service Options .............................................................................
l-5
Cover Page Options ...................................................................................
l-6
Billing and Statistics ...................................................................................
1-6
FaxMemo Hardware .....................................................................................
l-7
Equipment Supplied With FaxMemo ...........................................................
l-7
Series 6 Server Requirements .........................................................................

FaxMemo

Applications

.................................................................................

.. .

111

Table of Contents

2 Planning

Outside
DID

Caller

Access

Fax Call Routing

..................................................................................

Switch Integration

Fax Call Routing .............................................................

Switch TIE Trunk

Integration

Fax Call Routing

General Access Fax Call Routing..

3 Hardware

Installation

.................................................................

Fax
Fax
Fax
Fax
FaxMemo
FaxMemo

2-6

...........................................

3-l

3-2
Port Planning for Fax Mail ..................................................................
3-2
Port Planning for Fax Broadcast ..............................
............. .................3-2
Port Planning for Guaranteed Fax ........................................................
3-2
Port Planning for Fax Publishing .........................................................
3-3
..........................................................
3-3
Port Planning for Walkaway Fax
Hardware Configuration
Rules .....................................................
3-3
3-5
Card Planning Worksheet ............................................................
Application

Fax

2-5

Planning

How Fax Cards and Line Cards Communicate..
FaxMemo

..........................................

2-2
2-2

Port Requirements

....................................................

Task List and Procedures

4 Software

Configuration
Planning
Offline

Planning

Your FaxMemo
Configuration

FaxMemo

Configuration

.......................................................

...................................................................................

Classes of Service (COSs) .............................................................

4-l
4-1
4-l

4-2
.4-7
Fax Limits .................................................................................................
Fax Networking Features ............................................................................
4-P
FaxMemo and RCOS .................................................................................
4-P
Fax Features ...............................................................................................

Adding
FaxMemo

FaxMemo

Options

to COSs.. ...........................................................

Mailboxes

...................................................................................
Fax Mail Mailbox Configuration ..............................................................

Fax Broadcast Mailbox

.....................................................
Guaranteed Fax Mailbox Configuration ...................................................
Fax Publishing Mailbox Configuration .....................................................
Company Fax Cover Page ...........................................................................
Task List and Procedures

Configuration

4-P
4-12

4-12
-4-l 3
414
415
4-17

Table of Contents

5 FaxMemo

Billing

and Statistics

Billing Parameters . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . .. . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . 5- 1
5-l
Messages Received ......................................................................................
Disk Usage .................................................................................................

Fax Statistics .................................................................................................
Mailbox

5-3

Statistics .......................................................................................

System Statistics .. . . . .. . . .. . . .. .. . . . .. . . . . . . .. . . . . . . .. .. . . .. . . . .. . . . . .. . . . . .. . . .. .. . . . . . . . . .. . . . .. . ..-... 54
5-5
Fax Group Usage Report . . . . . . . . . . . ..~.................................-....................-...--..-.Task List and Procedures

6 FaxMemo

Troubleshooting
Configuration

Hardware

Problems . . . . . . .._...................-.............................

Problems . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . ._............_...........

Worksheets

List of Centigram

Index

Maps

Procedures

‘:. .._.................

. . . . .._..............................

6-l

6- 1

About

This Manual
This manual describes how to configure the FaxMemo
Centigram Series 6 Communications
Servers:

Who

Model

640

Model

120

Model 70

software in any of the

Should Read This Manual
This manual is intended for technicians and administrators who are responsible for
configuring the FaxMemo application on the Centigram Series 6 server.

How

to Use This Manual
This manual contains detailed reference information, a list of tasks that you can
perform, a collection of procedures for performing the tasks, and reader aids such as
menu maps.
--

Reference

Chapters

Use the material in chapters 1 through 6 for detailed inquiry into the installation and
configuration
of FaxMemo in a Centigram Series 6 Communications
Server. These
chapters discuss how components are related, elaborates on concepts, gives
operational details, and contains all necessary tables and figures about configuration.
Use the Cent&am Series Glnstalkztion and Service Man&appropriate
for your
platform for an actual server installation and the VoiceMemo Reference and
Configzcration Manualfor VoiceMemo software configuration.

Task lists
Task lists follow Reference chapters that include procedures. Use the task list,
starting with a principal task (shown in boldface), to install and configure
FaxMemo.
Each task listed is described in more detail in a procedure. The task list
is alphabetized, which helps most readers find the desired task (and procedure)

vii

quickly. No particular sequence of tasks is implied.
how a task list is organized:

The following

example shows

Task
VoiceMemo Release &On&d

Message Delivery

List
later

Catiguration-

Procedures
Procedures follow the task list in the Reference chapter. Follow the steps in
Centigram Procedures (G’s) to accomplish the desired tasks. Readers familiar with a
Centigram Series G server can use the CPs as a checklist if desired, while readers new
to a Centigram Series 6 server can use CPs for step-by-step instructions.
A reference column in each CP contains pointers, when necessary, to supplemental
information such as another procedure, another manual, a technical reference, or a
menu map.
Each CP is numbered for document identification and referencing; numbering does
not indicate a sequence of performance. A numerical list of all Cl?s in this manual is
also provided. It gives each CP’s title, Chapter number, and which other procedures
either call it or are called by it.

Maps

and Other

Navigation

Aids

Most of the documents in the new Centigram Series 6 document library have menu
maps. You can refer to these document navigation aids at any point to help you
reach a menu. And don’t overlook the index; it is the fastest way to fmd all
references to a specific topic.

Worksheets

ET
You will find blank worksheets in the back of this manual. Instructions for
completing the worksheets are in the Reference chapters. Many of the CPs assume
you have completed the appropriate worksheet.

Conventions

Used in This Manual
The procedures in this manual use the following conventions to describe how you
enter FaxMemo configuration information and how information
is displayed on the
Centigram Series G server console:
a.
Press Enter

Press the Enter key. For example, “Press Enter if the current
number is correct.” On some keyboards, this key is labeled
“Return” or has a return arrow (J) on it.

Enter

Type the text shown, then press the Enter key. For example, “Enter
the line number (l-24)” means type a number from 1 through 24,
and then press the Enter key.

bold

Words or characters in bold rype indicate either a value to be
entered by you exactly as shown or, when used to indicate a variable
entry, describe the type of value to be supplied by you. See example
above.
What you select from
a displayed menu

A displayed prompt
for information

Select:

(G) Current

Prompt:

Enter

Response; Number

Group

a group

number =
of the line group (l-24) to be used for the application.

\
What you enter iv
response to the prompt

Note:

Unless otherwise stated, press Enter after each response you enter.

Reader Advisories
Reader advisories used in this manual are shown below.

Note:

Information

especially useful in relation to this procedure.

CAUTION!
Information
A

that helps you prevent

equipment

or sofiware

damage.

CAUTION!
Information
that helps you avoid
(ESD) damage to the equipment.

electrostatic

discharge

WARNING!
Information
that
telecommunications

I
0
0

helps you
traffic.

prevent

an interruption

WARNING!
A hazard that can cause you personal injuxy.

DANGER!
Warns of a condition

that could severely injure or kill you.

Before

You Start
This manual assumes that you are familiar with using a console and keyboard.
section describes how to use the Centigram Series G server effectively.

Console

lips

This

and Techniques
The tips and techniques offered in the following paragraphs can make configuration
entry sessions at the Centigram Series 6 server maintenance console more productive.

Mewing

Menus
When you finish entering a value for a parameter, the server displays an
abbreviated form of the current menu, called the “short menu.” To view
the complete current menu when a short menu is displayed, just press
Enter.

To return to the Main Menu from any VoiceMemo

configuration

Accepting

application
menu, press X (Exit), until the Main Menu appears.

Defaults

To accept a default displayed in a prompt; just press Enter.

To accept a default displayed in a menu, no action is necessary.

Avoiding

Automatic

Exit

CAUTION!
The Centigram Series 6 server “times out”
This means that if you do not enter anything
15 minutes, the server automatically
exits
program. When this happens, all work that
on the disk is lost.

after 15 minutes.
at the console for
from the current
has not been saved

To avoid being timed out and losing your work, follow these steps:
1. When you need time to think, write down the name of the current menu.
2.

Exit to the (server) Main Menu.

3. When you want to continue your work, enter the appropriate
options to regain your place.

If you find that the Centigram Series 6 server has timed out, follow the steps below.
If your screen is blank, press any key to reactivate the screen and then continue with
these steps.

1. Press any key to start the login sequence.
2.

Enter your user ID and password (if requested).

Starting from the Main Menu, enter menu options to proceed to the menu
from which the server timed out.

Reenter data as needed to regain lost work.

Quitting

an Entry Session

At any point during entry of offline or online parameters, you&n quit.
discards all parameter entries you have made and leaves the VoiceMemo
configuration the way it was before you started entering parameters.
To quit from the VoiceMemo

Configuration

Oflline

Quitting
application

or Online Menu:

Select:
0
Q+- Forget Changes
Prompt
Quit and forget
changes?
(y/n) =
Response: Y to return to the VoiceMemo Configuration
Main Menu.

Shortcut

Commands

You can use the Ctrl (Control) key or the / (slash) key while simu.lmneously pressing
another key to execute shortcut commands at an Centigram Se&s 6 server
maintenance console.

GCOS menus, return to the VoiceMemo
Configuration
Menu and save any entries.
From the oflline or online menus, or FCOS, LCOS,
GCOS menus, return to the VoiceMemo
Configuration
Menu without saving any entries.
Stop scrolling a displayed report.
Resume scrolling a displayed report.

xii

Preparing

for a Configuration

Session

Before you begin a configuration

session, you need the following:

The VoiceMemo R&wnce and ConJ;guation

A Centigram

At least two telephones for configuration

A blank 3.5-inch diskette on which you can copy your configuration

Completed

Manual

Series G server maintenance console (video monitor
keyboard) and VoiceMemo module, with power on

and

testing

worksheets (an initial supply of blank worksheets is included in

the VoiceMemo ltejmence and Configuration

Manmzl)

”

.. .

Xl11

FaxMemo

Features

and

Functions

FaxMemo is an optional feature that allows VoiceMemo users and outside callers to
exchange faxes through user mailboxes and special mailboxes. It consists of one or
more FaxMemo cards and software integral to the Centigram Series 6
Communication
Server, and provides a set of fax-related features and limits that you
can assign to VoiceMemo mailboxes.
In a common fax transmission, the sender inserts a document into the sending fax
machine. The document is scanned and sent as data to the receiving fax machine,
where it is printed out, as shown in Figure l-l.
8.
FAX
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
. .

. .

.
.
.
.
.

a
eJ

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
a
. . . .

FAX
WOlFAX

Figure

l-1

Common

Fax Transmission

With FaxMemo, fax documents are stored electronically as “fax messages” in
VoiceMemo mailboxes. From there, faxes can be delivered to any fax machine at any
time, distributed to other mailboxes, sent over a network, or viewed on a PC
(requires the OneView optional feature). Figure l-2 shows the basic operation of
FaxMemo.

fB
FAX

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
. .

. .

. .
?A
. .
. .
. .

.
.
.
. .

. .

f&3

FAX

6002FAX

Figure

1-2

Fax Transmission

With FaxMemo

1-l

FaxMemo Features and Functions

FaxMemo

overcomes many of the problems inherent in typical fax communication:

Callers sending a fax do not have to wait due to the receiving fax
machine being busy with another transmission.

Faxes are stored in password-protected
user mailboxes.
at the fax machine for anyone to read.

Recipients receive notification when a new fax arrives. Incoming faxes
do not sit for days because recipients do not know they are there.

Faxes can be annotated with voice messages (also called voice
coversheets), relieving the sender of typing out explanatory notes.

The recipient decides when and where a fax is printed out. For example,
a FaxMemo user away from the office could call his VoiceMemo mailbox
and direct a fax, deposited there by someone else, to be delivered to his
hotel, the airport, or wherever there is a convenient fax machine. After
reading the fax, he could call back into his mailbox and send the fax to
another party, perhaps a prospect waiting for a quotation.

For a description

of end-user features and functions,

Faxes do not sit

see the User Gaidefor

VoiceMemo and Fdmo.

FaxMemo

Applications

FaxMemo applications include Fax Mail, Fax Broadcast, Guaranteed Fax, Fax
Publishing, and Walkaway Fax. You can use one or more of these applications, in
any combination.
For more information
about planning and configuring these
applications, see the “Sofiware Configuration
Planning” chapter.

Fax Mail
Fax Mail is the most general and widely used application of FaxMemo. With Fax
Mail, incoming faxes are stored electronically as “fax messages” in a user’s mailboxthe same mailbox that stores voice messages. Users are then notified of their new fax
messages in the same manner as with voice messages (for example, message waiting
light, pager, stutter dial tone).
By calling into their mailboxes, users can retrieve their fax messages at any time by
sending them to any fax machine. In addition, users can call into their mailboxes
from fax phones and retrieve their fax messages “online” at that fax machine. Users
of Fax Mail have the same options that are available to them through voice mail: fax
messages can be played, answered, or given to another mailbox, distribution list, or
off-system telephone (fax> number.

l-2

FaxMemo Feanues and Functions

Fax Broadcast
Fax Broadcast allows a user to make and send a fax message simultaneously to
multiple destinations using a distribution list. The destinations can include any
other users’ mailboxes, users on another VoiceMemo system connected with
Centigram’s MESA-Net digital network, or outside telephone numbers. For
example, a product manager could disseminate price changes to the sales force with a
copy of the new price list and an attached voice message explaining the changes. Fax
Broadcast messages can be scheduled for future delivery (when rates are lower), and
the Series 6 server can automatically retry calls to numbers that are busy or do not
answer.

Guaranteed

Fax
with FaxMemo, delivery of incoming faxes can be guaranteed even when the
company or department fax machine is busy, runs out of paper, or is otherwise
disabled. One or more Guaranteed Fax mailboxes are assigned to a hunt group with
the fax machine. When the machine is busy, the incoming faxes are routed to and
stored in the mailboxes; the caller never realizes that the fax did not go directly to a
fax machine. The mailboxes then automatically and continually try to deliver the
stored faxes to the same or another f$x machine.

Fax Publishing
You can configure a FaxMemo mailbox to deliver a voice message and a fax to any
caller on reaching the mailbox. This provides a convenient way to publish frequently
requested information
to employee users, customers, or any outside callers.
The caller can reach the mailbox containing the appropriate information directly or
be led by voice prompts through a mailbox tree or chain structure. The mailbox
containing the fax can do either of the following:

Walkaway

Play a voice coversheet or a menu or both, giving the caller the choice to
either receive the fax online or enter a telephone number for delivery of
the fax.

Immediately

begin transmitting

the fax.

Fax
Walkaway Fax appears to the sender exactly like a regular fax machine. With this
feature, callers dial a telephone number (from a fax machine or a PC running fax
software) and immediately send a fax, without a voice coversheet, directly into a
user’s mailbox. Callers do not have to respond to prompts or monitor the call. The
walkaway Fax Mailbox listens for fax tone while playing a greeting, and if detected,
receives the incoming fax. If none is detected, normal message recording ensues.

1-3

FaxMemo

Features and Functions

FaxMemo

Flexible

Configuration

The FaxMemo configuration software includes menu selections so the system
administrator can assign FaxMemo resources to line groups and add the fax options
to existing FCOSs (Features Classes of Service), LCOSs (Limits Classes of Service),
and NCOSs (Network Classes of Service) e RCOS (Restriction Class of Service)
settings can also be used to control fax delivery destinations.

Class of Service

Options
Following are lists of FaxMemo feature, limit, and network options. Each of these
options is described in detail in chapter 4, Software Configuration
Planning.
FCOS Fax Options

Receive fax messages
Make fax messages
Give fax messages
Deliver fax to default fax phone number
Deliver fax online
Deliver fax to designated telephone number
User changeable default fax phone number for fax delivery
Fax on demand
Receive fax messages only
Automatic receipt for fax message sent
Fax cover page
Walkaway Fax
Discard fax messages after delivery
Fax verify
Deny user change of fax cover page
Display a FROM field on fax cover pages
Display a promotional message on fax cover pages
Automatic fax retrieval
End of session delivery
Retrieve all unplayed faxes
Receive fax on record timeout
Play fixed initial prompt for walkaway fax
LCOS Fax Options
l
l

e
l

1-4

Maximum number of digits allowed for the fax delivery phone number
Number of fax messages per mailbox
CNG tone detection length
Fax delivery retry frequency

FaxMemo Features and Functions

Fax delivery retry interval
Retention time for played, unplayed, and urgent fax messages
Retention time for fax receipts

l
l
l

NCOS

Make fax message to the network
Give fax message to the network
Answer fax message to the network

l
l
l

Cover

Page

Fax Options

Options
FaxMemo

provides three cover page options for faxes sent out from the server:

Each mailbox owner can have a personal fax cover page. This option
allows a mailbox owner to fax their own cover. page into their mailbox
(via the User Options Menu). The system sends the personal cover page
with any fax sent from the mailbox to a telephone number. Faxes
retrieved online do not include a cover page.

The system can send a company cover page. If a cover page is put in the
administrator’s mailbox, it becomes the cover page for all faxes sent from
that line group for all mailboxes that do not have a personal cover page.
You can assign separate administrator’s mailboxes, each with a different
cover page, to each outbound line group with fax capability.

The system generates a default cover page for any mailboxes that do not
have a personal or company cover page. The default cover page contains
the following information:
l
l

l
l

Note:

A “To” field showing the name of the sending mailbox
A “From” field, indicating the system or service that the fax was
sent from (optional)
The number of pages in the fax
A time field, showing the time that the fax was sent, including a
time zone designator
The date that the fax was sent from the mailbox (not the date the
fax was sent to the mailbox)
A promotional or greeting message of up to 60 characters
(optional)
If feature bit 200 is not enabled for a mailbox, the system does not
send any cover page.

l-5

FaxMemo Features and Functions

Billing

and Statistics
The Series 6 server keeps records of fax traffic, both at the system and mailbox level.
Mailbox owners can be billed for faxes sent and.received, either in terms of the
number of faxes, or in terms of the total number of pages
Series 6 servers offer two other methods of billing mailbox owners for fax usage. Fax
transactions are recorded in Call Detail Recorder records, which can be downloaded
to a computerized billing system for interpretation
and billing. Or the server can
place fax calls using mailbox owners’ long distance carriers and calling card numbers.
This can eliminate the need for any further billing, because there is no toll incurred
by the server.
Fax statistics
storage.

reports are also available to monitor

See the FaxMemo
topics.

FaxMemo

the use of fax groups
4

and fax

Billing and Statistics chapter for more information

on these

Hardware
The MVIP faxcards used in Series 6 servers work with the line cards to provide fax
services during call sessions. The MVIP fax cards do not have direct telephone
interfaces. They communicate over the MWP bus with the line cards, which contain
the telephone interface hardware and control the call sessions. -Figure l-3 illustrates
these communication
paths.
MVIP Bus
/

Figure

1-3

Fax Card to Line Card Communication

Because MVIP fax cards are not physically attached to an individual line or line card,
they can communicate over the MVIP bus with any line card. In this way, they can

1-6

FaxMemo Features and Functions

serve as a fax resource to any line card. MVIP fax cards can be a dynamicallyallocated resource pool for several line card groups, or they can be assigned to a single
line group. When a fax group is assigned to a line group and the number of fax
channels is the same as the number of line ports, the fax group is a’tdicated.With a
dedicated fax group, there is always a fax resource available for every line port.
See the Hardware Installation
FaxMemo hardware.

Equipment

l%nnin

g chapter for a further explanation

Supplied

With

Each FaxMemo

package includes the following

FaxMemo
items:

Two 3.5-&h
FaxMemo Optional Feature software ‘diskettes
One or more MVIP Faxh4erno cards with two, four, or eight-port
capacities
One V&Nemo
F’cMemo Manual (this document)
The number of user guides ordered

l
l

If any of these items are missing, contact your Centigram

Series 6 Server

distributor.

Requirements

FaxMemo can be installed and enabled in any Series 6 server with VoiceMemo
Release 5.02 Revision A software or later. Your system must have Release 6.0 or later
to use MSQP FaxMemo cards that work with line cards on the MVIP bus.
Your system must have one empty card slot for each FaxMemo

card to be installed.

You must take the sewer out of service for about I5 to 30 minutes for FaxMemo
card installation. The total time required depends on the number of FaxMemo cards
that you will iustall. tier you install the hardware and configure the software, you
must activate the new corr&uration,
resulting in a momentary loss of call processing
capabilities.

Note:

If your Series G server was ordered as a new system with the
FaxMemo optional feature, the FaxMemo cards and software were
installed at the factory.

1-7

Planning

Outside

Caller

Access

With the FaxMemo optional feature, outside callers can leave fax messages for
mailbox owners just as if they were sending a fax to a fax machine. In most
instances, callers believe they are dialing directly to a fax machine, and are not
prepared to perform any special functions to deliver a fax. Therefore, for the fax
mail application to be effective, the system must allow the callers to deposit faxes into
the appropriate mailboxes without any unexpected requirements.
In most non-service provider FaxMemo installations, mailbox owners have two
mailboxes on the system. The first is their standard mailbox where they receive and
play their messages. The second is a broadcast mailbox with walkway fk enabled
which is transparent to the mailbox owner and automatically sends fax messages into
the mailbox’owner’s standard mailbox upon message receipt, as shown in Figure 2-1.
The reason for the broadcast mailbox is to allow mailbox owners to publish a
telephone number where callers can send a fax directly to them. This second number
goes directly to the broadcast mailbox without first ringing at any telephone. This
allows for a situation that is familiar to both the caller and the mailbox owner.
PBX/CO

.
.
.
.

Voice calls to
ext. 1234

RNA/Busy forward

Fax cells to
ext 1235

Figure 2-l

The Broadcast

Fax Mailbox

Setup

There are several ways that callers sending faxes can be routed to the correct
mailboxes. These include DID routing, Switch Integration routing, Switch Tie
Trunk Integration routing, and General Access. It is possible to combine two or
more of these methods to meet user needs and cost requirements.

2-1

Planning

Outside

Caller Access

Note:

The primary purpose of the call routing scenarios in this chapter is
to show possible switch connections. There are many ways to
configure line groups and assign fax resources. Fax resources can be
dedicated to a single lime group or shared by inbound and
outbound line groups.

DID Fax Call Routing
The simplest routing method is to connect a second FaxMemo-equipped
inbound
line group to DID trunks directly from the CO. In this scenario, each mailbox
owner that has fax mail capability is provided with a DID telephone number that
allows a caller to deposit a fax message, or voice and fax message, into a broadcast
mailbox on the system. Because the DID method involves additional trunks from
the central office that bypass the PBX, it can be used in any &itch environment.
It
does incur the expense of the DID lines and DID numbers for all users with
FaxMemo capability. Figure 2-2 shows this configuration.

and Messages

Fax Retrieval

Figure 2-2

Switch

Integration

A - Inbound Integrated Line Group without Fax Resources
B - inbound DID Line Group with Assigned Fax Resources
C - Outbound Line Group with Assigned Fax Resources

DID Fax Call Routing

Fax Call Routing

Fax Mail is supported by most of Centigram’s PBX and Centrex integrations.
Switch integration works the same way as DID fax call routing in that the caller is
directed immediately to the appropriate mailbox. This method requires every person
with Fax Mail capability to have a-second DID number (both CO and PBX) that

2-2

Planning

Outside

Caller Access

goes to a software-only phantom extension on the PBX. The phantom extension
numbers must correspond to the broadcast mailbox numbers, and must be hardforwarded to the VoiceMemo pilot number. This method of fax call routing is
shown in Figure 2-3.

voiceCalls
and

Messages

m-9
FAX

.
..
.

Fax Retrieval

Figure 2-3

A - inbound Integrated Line Group with Assigned Fax Resources
B - Outbound, Line Group with Assigned Fax Resources

Switch

Integration

Fax Call Routing,

Method

The advantage of this method is that fax calls are answered immediately by the
desired party’s FaxMemo broadcast mailbox, and it does not require any trunks
directly from the central office. However, it does require the expense of an
additional DID number for each mailbox owner with fax capability.
Not all switches support a phantom extension capability. If your switch does not
support this, then you must use another method If your switch supports multiple
in-bound line groups, you can use the second method of switch integration.

2-3

Planning

Outside

Caller Access

PBX
RI&BUS

Fonvar J

Voice Calls
and Messages

+
Hunt 1

@3
FAX

..
..
.

..
..
. .

-. .

.._..__.-..

-gzB

..A..........

VoiceEax
Message Deposit

d&l
... -a A+. . .
. . .
a
. . . . . .

FAX

Fax Retrieval

Figure 2-4

2-4

ema=Ax

A - Inbound Integrated Line Group without Fax Resources
B - Inbound Integrated Line Group with Assigned Fax Resources
C - Outbound Line Group with Assigned Fax Resources

Switch

Integration

Fax Call Routing,

Method

Planning

Switch

TIE Trunk

Integration

Outside

Caller Access

Fax Call Routing

This method utilixes the tandem switching capabilities of many PBXs. If the
integration routing method is not supported by your switch, this method still allows
you to use a line group to the switch from the CO, but could require additional
cards in the PBX This method also requires everyone with fax capabiliry to have a
second DID number from the CO.
When the switch receives a call on one of the DID lines, it passes the call and its
related information to the Series 6 server over a set of TIE trunks. The call
information allows the server to connect the caller to the appropriate mailbox.
Figure 2-5 shows this method of fax call routing.

..:::....
voicecall.5

and Messages

vok9/mt
Message Deposit

m7FAx

Fax Retrieval

Figure

A - Inbound Integrated Line Group without Fax Resources
B - Inbound TIE Trunks Line Group with Assigned Fax Resources
_ C - Outbound Line Group with Assigned Fax Resources

2-5

Switch

TIE Trunk

Integration

Fax Call Routing

One disadvantage of TIE trunk integration is that many PBXs do not allow callers to
transfer on TIE trunks. If most of the calls on these trunks are fax calls though, few
callers need to transfer.

2-5

Planning

Outside

General

Caller Access

Access

Fax Call Routing

The alternative to DID or switch integration routing is to have a single fax message
number that, upon answering, requests that the caller enter the mailbox number of
the party who will receive the fax. Figure 2-6 shows these calls routed directly to the
inbound line group. The advantage of this access method is the security arid
screening that it offers, since only those who know the mailbox number can access it.
This method is available on any PBX or key system with no special hardware or
software requirements.

PBX
Voice calls
and Messages

I
RNA/BUS
Forwe
JJ

co
I

-43
Hunt

Fax Retrieval

Figure 2-6

2-G

A - Inbound Line Group with Assigned Fax Resources
B - Outbound Line Group with Assigned Fax Resources

General

Access Fax Call Routing

Hardware

Installation

Warming

Planning the hardware to support FaxMemo
l

Knowing

Understanding

Understanding the requirements
will use on your system

involves:

how you will route fax calls to the Series G server (Chapter 2)
the relationship

of fax cards to line cards
of the FaxMemo

application(s)

that you

*,
l

Knowing

the expected volume of fax call traffic for your system

Following

the five hardware configuration

You need all of this information

How

Fax Cards and line

rules

to fill out the FaxMemo

Cards

Card Worksheets.

Communicate

Fax cards and line cards work together to provide fax services on a Series 6 server.
The line card handles all line signaling, supetision, and voice/f+ transmissions.
The fax cards have no direct connection to telephone services, but communicate with
the line cards over the MVIP bus, as shown in Figure 3-l.
MVIP Buss

Figure 3-l

Fax Card to line Card Communication

A voice port requests a fax resource over the ANIP bus when it detects an incoming
fax tone during a walkaway fax call session or when a user pushes a key to leave a fax.

3-1

Hardware Installation Planning

Once an association with a fax channel is made, the voice port passes all fax-related
data to the fax channel, which converts it into a format suitable for storage on the
system hard disks. When the fax transmission/reception
is complete, the voice port
releases the fax channel and continues with the call session. The fax channel is
immediately available to service other voice ports.

FaxMemo

Application

Port Requirements

Each FaxMemo application has unique requirements for fax-equipped ports on a
Series 6 server. You can combine any or all FaxMemo applications on the same line
groups, provided you allow enough FaxMemo cards to carry the call traf&.

Fax Port Planning

for Fax Mail

For general purpose Fax Mail between outside callers and mailbox owners, and
between mailbox owners, you need fax groups connected with both inbound and
outbound line groups. The requirements parallel those for voice message handling.
Inbound line groups with fax are required for outside callers or users depositing faxes
in mailboxes and for users retrieving faxes online. Outbound line groups with fz are
required for users to deliver their faxes to a fax machine, or to send a fax to an offsystem number. (The “give fax message” option is handled by software and does not
use a fax port.)

Fax Port Planning

for Fax Broadcast

Fax Broadcast is like Fax Mail, but with many recipients for each fax message. Fax
Broadcast allows a user to send a fax message to a number of people by using the
VoiceMemo distribution
list features. The sender uses an inbound fax-equipped
port to send the fax to a personal distribution list or to a master broadcast mailbox.
The server distributes the fax directly to on-system users (no fax port is needed for
distribution).
Fax groups connected with inbound and outbound line groups are
required for users to retrieve their faxes as described in Fax Mail.
If users broadcast often to off-system numbers, you must size the system with the
appropriate number of outdialing ports that can use fax resources.

Fax Port Planning

for Guaranteed

Fax

In Guaranteed Fax, you include FaxMemo mailboxes in a hunt group with company
or department fax machines to handle the overflow when the machines are busy or
out of service. Guaranteed Fax requires an inbound line group with fax for the
mailboxes on the hunt group. Faxes outbound from these mailboxes to fax machines
need outbound fax port capability. If traffic allows, you can assign the outbound
port capability to Fax Mail or Fax Broadcast outbound ports.

3-2

Hardware

Fax Port Planning

Installation

Planning

for Fax Publishing

A Fax Publishing application usually has some number of documents stored in
special fau mailboxes on the Series G server. Callers that reach the system use their
push-button phones to request that certain documents be faxed to them. Fax
Publishing requires a minimum number of fax channels connected with inbound
line groups to place the documents in the system for retrieval.
If you allow callers to receive the fax documents online (that is, while calling from a
fax machine), you need fax groups connected with an inbound line group. If you
require callers to input the phone number of their fax machine for delivery, you only
need fax groups connected with an outbound line group. If you offer callers their
choice of methods, you need fax groups for both inbound and outbound line
groups. You might require dedicated fax groups, depending on the number of calls
expected and the number of faxes published sirnultaneonsly.

Fax Port Planning

for Walkaway

Fax

Walkaway Fax is a special feature that you can activate for Fax Mail, Fax Broadcast,
and Guaranteed Fax applications. When Walkaway Fax is activated, callers can send
from a normal fax machine (or PC with a fax card) to the Series G server just as if
they were sending to another fax machine - they do not need to listen or respond to
any voice prompts before sending a fax.
Walkaway Fax by itself only requires fax groups connected with inbound line groups
to deposit faxes. Depending on which other FaxMemo applications you are using
with Walkaway Fax, mailbox owners may be able to use the same inbound line
group to retrieve the faxes on line, or you may need fax groups on an outbound line
group so that users can deliver their faxes to fax machines.

FaxMemo

Hardware

Configuration

Rules

It is easier to plan fax cards if you familiarize yourself with these five hardware
configuration rules.

Rule #l:

Every voice port that either
access to a fax channel.

sends or rece’nres a fax must have

Any call that either deposits a fax or retrieves a fax message on line (caller is calling
from a fax phone) must be answered by a voice port with access to a fax channel.
Likewise, any outbound call that delivers a fax must be made from a voice port with
access to a fax channel. Voice ports in line groups that are not assigned to a fax
group cannot send or receive faxes.
Fax channels do not have to be assigned in a one-to-one relationship with voice
ports. Because the FaxMemo cards use the h4VIP bus to communicate with the line

3-3

Hardware Installation Planning

cards and do not have direct connections to specific phone lines, any channel on a
FaxMemo card can service any port on any line card in the same module. In
addition, fax channels are allocated dynamically - once a channel completes a
session, it is available to service another session on another port.
See rule #2 and rule #3 for more information

on assigning fax channels to voice

ports.

Rule #2:

A fax group

can be shared

by more than one line group.

A fax group (a defined set of fax channels) can be assigned to more than one line
group, and its channels are then shared by the voice ports in those line groups. Fax
groups can be shared by both inbound and outbound line groups. Figure 3-2 shows
a shared fax group.
8.
There can be more voice ports than fax channels - the fax channels are allocated as
they are needed for the different call sessions. If all of the fax channels in the fax
group are in use by call sessions and another call session requests a fax resource, the
system informs the caller that the fax cannot be sent/received.

Rule #3:

A fax group must be dedicated
availability
of a fax resource.

to a line group

to guarantee

When there is a one-to-one relationship between the number of voice ports in a line
group and the number of channels in its associated fax group, the fax group is
considered dedicatedto the line group. This configuration ensures that voice ports in
line groups that carry a lot of fax tra%c will never be unable to get a fix resource.
A Series 6 server can have dedicated and shared fax groups, as show in Figure 3-2.

Fax Group 2 shared
y Line Groups 2 and 3
\

‘---

---w-_-c

Figure 3-2

_____--____--------------

Fax Group to line Group

--/

Relationships

1
I
I
I
I
6027FAx

Hardware

Rule #4:

Line groups connected
VoiceMemo functions.

to fax groups

Installation Planning

can still perForm

all other

Ports that are equipped for FaxMemo can per&m any VoiceMemo function.
For
example, the same outbound line group that delivers faxes can also make message
delivery and paging calls. L&wise, the same line group that performs telephone
answering functions can also receive inbound faxes. There is no need to dedicate line
groups to perform FaxMemo functions.

Rule #5:

It may be a better use of system resources
line group for some fax applications.

to have a separate

In most FaxMemo installations, every line group in the system does not need a
dedicated fax group. The only time a fax channel is absolutely required on an
inbound call is when a caller sends a fax. The only time a fax channel is required on
an outbound call is when the system needs to deliver a fax.
For some fax applications, such as Fax Mail, a fairly low percentage of calls involve
fax transactions. The fax traffic for these applications probably can be carried by a
single fax group that is shared by incoming and outgoing line groups. The number
of fax channels in the fax group should be large enough to provide an acceptable
grade of service to fax callers.
For other fax applications, such as Fax Publishing, it is likely that every call involves a
fax transaction. You may want to have a separate line group for these applications
and dedicate a fax group to the line group so that there is always a fax channel for
every voice port. The line group may be incoming or outgoing, depending on
whether callers must call in from a fax machine and receive faxes online (incoming),
or whether they can enter a phone number for the fax to be delivered (outgoing).
By configuring some fax groups as shared and others as dedicated, you can utilize
your fax resources to provide an appropriate grade of service for each fax application.
Note:

FaxMemo

Card

If a caller on an inbound line group tries to send a fax when there
are no resources available, the system plays a prompt telling the
caller that it cannot process the request at that time. If there are no
fax resources available for an outgoing fax call, the server retries the
call (according to LCOS settings) until one is available.

Planning

Worksheet

With the information that you have gathered from chapters 2 and
able to fill in the FaxMemo Card Planning Worksheets. A sample
follows. Blank worksheets for photocopying are in the worksheets
of this manual. Make a copy for each server module in which you
FaxMemo cards.

3, you should be
worksheet
section at the end
are installing

3-5

Hardware

Installation

Planning

For each fax card in each module, enter the Faxhkmo card serial number, the system
slot number, the number of channels on the fax card, and the base I/O address (see
Technical Reference 1904). Identify the fax group that each fax channel belongs to,
and the line group(s) that it is connected with, and whether the fax group is
dedicated to one line group or shared.

Hardware Installation Planning

FaxMemo

Card

Planning

Worksheet

Hardware
Backplane
Module

No.

Slot No.

FaxMemo
Card
Serial No.

Number
of
Channels

413

Base I/O

/ Address

100

128

100 I

Module

512

Confiauration
Fax Group
Connect

with

line

Group(s):

#:
I

Triplet

1:15:0

1:15:1
1:15:2
1:15:3

Total

Number

Dedicated

of Channels:
Shared

Triplet

(module:slot:channel)

I
I
I
I

(module:slot:channel)

I
I
I
I

1:14:0

1:14:1
1:14:2
1:14:3
1:14:4

Prepared By:
Installed By:

1:15:5

1:14:5

1:15:6

1:14:6

1:15:7

1:14:7

Date:
Date:

3-7

Hardware

Change
VoiceMemo

Pagelofl
Release G.OA and later

Task

FaxMemo

Task list

Procedure

Hardware

Changes

Replace an MVIP

Fax Card .................................................................

Install an MVII? Fax Card ........................................................................
Remove an MVIP Fax Card .....................................................................

CP 2146
CP 7510
CP 7511

cd146

Replace an MVIP

Fax Card

VoiceMemo

Page 1 of2
Release G.OA and later

This procedure describes how to replace an MVIP fax card in a Series 6 server.

DANGER!
f

Disconnect the system from its power source before connecting
components, or both.

cables,

CAUTION!
Protect your
components.

system

from

ESD

damage

during

handling

of all

WARNING!
This process requires the module to be shut down, resulting in loss of
call processing capabilities. Centigram recommends that you perform
thi s procedure during periods of low call traffic.

Note:

@2l Observe

You can find ‘IRS referenced in this procedure in the Ce&gnzm
lZej4ffence Mand.

Series G :Te

Precautions

1. Put on a grounded wrist strap, attaching the other end to the Series 6 server. Doing
so protects the component from electrostatic discharge.
2.

Shut down the system, press the reset button,

and turn off the power.

cl? 5700

CAUTION!
A

Removing a component
while the power is on can severely
damage both the component you are working on and others.

3. Wait one minute after you turn off the power before you remove any components.
The hard disk should stop spinning and be quiet.
4. When removing a component, place it on a non-conductive surface, such as an antistatic bag. Make sure you have the anti-static bags required before you begin.

@IQ Before
5.

Configure

You Begin
the fax card.

TR 1904

D0CRcv.A

GP 2146
Page 2 of 2 Release G.OA and later
Rei%m2ce

SFP
@D Remove the Fax Card
6.

Remove the cover on the system. On a Model 640, remove the front panel of the
CPU assembly.

Identify

the fax card to remove.

8. Using the plastic loops, remove the MVIP cable. You only need to remove the cable
from enough cards so that you can access the fax card.
9. Use a screwdriver to unfasten the bracket screw that holds the fax card to the yd
10. Grasp the fax card firmly, and pull it straight out.
11. Place the fax card on a static bag.

CD Install the New Fax Card
12. Pick up the new fax card. Hold it with the backplane connector
you.
13. Insert the fax card into the alignment

facing away from

grooves of the card cage.

.l4. Slide the fax card along the grooves until the fax card backplane connector
touching the corresponding connector on the backplane.

15. Be sure that the two connectors are properly aligned, then press firmly on the edge
of the fax card until the connectors are fully seated.
16. Tighten

the bracket screw that holds the fax card in the card cage.

17. Reconnect the MVIp

cable to all appropriate

cards.

18. Replace the cover on the system.
19. Restore power to the server.
-

20. If you installed the new card in a different slot, or if the replacement card is not
identical to the card that you removed (same number of channels, same base I/O
address), delete the old card and add the new card to the Resource Manager.

cage.

07510

Page 1 of 2

Install an MYIP Fax Card
This procedure

VoiceMemo

describes how to install an MVIP

Release 6.OA and later

fax card in a Series 6 server.

DANGER!
Disconnect the server from irs power source before connecting
components, or both.

cables,

CAUTION!
Protect your
components.

server

from

ESD

damage

during

handling

all

WARNING!
This process requires the module to be shut down, resulting in loss of
call processing capabilities.
Centigram recommends that you perform
this procedure during periods of low call traffic.

Note:

You can find TRs referenced in this procedure in the Centigram Series G Technical
Reference Manual.

Reference

Step

@II Observe

Precautions

1. Put on a grounded wrist strap, attaching the other end to the Series 6 server. Doing
so protects the component from electrostatic discharge.
2.

Shut down the server, press the reset button,

and turn off the power.

CAUTION!
A

Removing
a component
while the power
damage both the component you are working

is on can severely
on and others.

Wait one minute after you turn off the power before you remove any components.
The hard disk should stop spinning and be quiet.

When removing a component, place it on a non-conductive
surface, such as an antistatic bag. Make sure you have the anti-static bags required before you begin.

@I9 Install

the Fax Card

Set switches on the MVIP

fax card.

Remove the cover on the server. On a Model
CPU assembly.

TR 1904
640, remove the front panel of the

Dot Rev. A

cl? 7510
Page 2 of 2
VoiceMemo Release 6.OA and later

werence

Step
7.

Using the plastic loops, remove the MVIP cable. You only need to remove it from
enough cards so that you can install the fax card.

Pick up the fax card. Hold it with the backplane connector facing away from you.

Insert the fax card into the alignment

grooves of the card cage.

10. Slide the fax card along the grooves until the fax card backplane connector is
touching the corresponding connector on the backplane.
11. Be sure that the two connectors are properly

aligned, then press firmly on the edge
r.
of the fax card until the connectors are fully seated.

12. Tighten

the bracket screw that holds the fax card in the card cage.

13. Reconnect the hNIP

cable to all appropriate

14. Replace the cover on the server.
15. Restore power to the server.

Dar RN. A

cards.

cl?7511
Remove an MMP

Fax

Page 1 of 2

Card

VoiceMemo

This procedure describes how to remove an MVIP

Release 6.OA and later

fax card from a Series 6 server.

DANGER!
Disconnect the server from its power source before connecting
components, or both.

cables,

CAUTION!
Protect

your
components.

server

from

ESD

damage

during

handling

all

WARNING!
This process requires the module to be shut down, resulting in loss of call
processing capabilities.
Centigram recommends that you perform this
procedure during periods of low call traffic.
Reference

Step

@D Observe

Precautions

1. Put on a grounded wrist strap attaching, the other end to the Series 6 server. Doing
so protects the component from electrostatic discharge.
2.

Shut down the server, press the reset button,

then turn off the server power.

2 5700, Ch. 4

CAUTION!
Removing
a component
while the power is on can severely
damage both the component you are working on and others.
-

Wait one minute after you turn off the power before you remove any components.
The hard disk should stop spinning and be quiet.

When removing a component, place it on a non-conductive
surface, such as an antistatic bag. Make sure you have the anti-static bags required before you begin.

@B Remove

the Fax Card

Remove the cover on the server. On a Model
CPU assembly.

640, remove the front panel of the

Identify

Using the plastic loops, remove the MVIP cable. You only need to ‘remove the cable
from enough cards so that you can access the fax card.

Use a-screwdriver to unfasten the bracket screw that holds the fax card to the card cage.

the fax card to remove.

Dot Rev. A

cl? 7511
Page 2 of 2
Vo&eMemo Release G.OA and later
Reference

SteD

Grasp the fax card firmly, and pull it straight out.

10. Place the fax card on a static bag.
11. Reconnect the MVIP

cable to all appropriate

12. Replace the cover on the server.
13. Restore power to the server.

Doe Rcy. A

cards.

Configuration
VoiceMemo

Task list
Page 1 of 1
Release 6.OA and later
Procedure

Task

FaxMemo

Configuration
Add FaxMemo

to a Series 6 Server ......................................................

cl? 6449
Cl’ 6453

...............................................................

Con.@ure

for Fax Broadcast

Codgure

for Fax Mail .......................................................................

Canfigure

for Fax Publishing

..............................................................

CP 6451

Coufigure

for Guaran teed Fax ............................................................

CP 6452

Fax Cover Page ......................................

CP 6454

Setup a Company

CP 6450

.................

Activate the Inactive Configuration
..........................................................
Add or Delete Feature Bits .......................................................................

Cl? 7002

..........................................................

cl? 7506

Time Zones for FaxMemo .......................................................
Customize a Default FCOS ......................................................................
Customize an FCOS Copy .......................................................................
Define a Fax Group ..................................................................................

a? 7509
Cl’ 5008

Feature .......................................................................
Set Limits for FaxMemo ...........................................................................
Shut Down the System .............................................................................
Verify Configuration
Parameters ..............................................................

Cl? 5402

Configure

a Mailbox

for FaxMemo

Configure

Install an Optional

cl? 5011

CP 5007
Cl’7512
Cl? 7508
CP 5700
Cl? 5015

Dar Rev. A

cl?
Customize

an FCOS Copy

This procedure
FCOS.

VoiceMemo

5007

Page 1 of 2
Release G.OA and later

describes how to customize an FCOS by modifying
. _ a copy
_. of an existing
Reference

step

1. Choose the existing FCOS you wish to use as a basis for your customized FCOS.
2.

Complete

Reach the System Configuration
Menu, then go to the Feature Class of Service
Menu. Enter the requested information, as described in the following steps, from
your completed FCOS Worksheet.

Note:

an FCOS Worksheet.

Blank worksheets are near the back of this manual.
vienu Map 11

You can quit at any point in the following steps before you exit the
Feature Class of Service Menu. Quitting discards all entries you have 8.
made and leaves the FCOS settings the way they were before you reached
the Feature Class of Service Menu.
To quit:
Make sure the Feature Class of Service Menu is displayed (short form or
long form).

select:

(Q) Quit - Forget Changes

Ihmpt:

Quit

and forget

changes?

(y/n)

Response: Y for yes.

Number
Select:

and name the customized

FCOS.

FCOS to modify
=
Response: A number from 18 through 20 or 25 throuPh 640.
Prompt:

select:

(N) Name FCOS

Prompt:
Enter FCOS name (0 - 15 chars)
=
Response: Enter a descriptive name to accompany the customized FCOS.

Make a copy of the existing FCOS.
Select:

(K) Copy FCOS

Prcmzpt:

FCOS to copy

(? for

help)

Response: The number

of the existing FCOS chosen to be the basis for your
customized FCOS. A copy of this FCOS is created and given the
number and name you assigned above.

Dot. RN. A

CP 5007

Page 2 of 2
VoiceMemo Release G.OA and later
Step

Reference

6. Add feature bits to the FCOS copy, as desired.
Sekct:

(A) Add Features

prompt.- Features
to add (? for help)
=
Response: The 1 to S-digit numbers of the feature bits to be added.
l

Feature bits can be entered in any of the formats shown below:
A single bit, for example 208
A range of bits, for example 202-208
A series of bits, for example, 39,40,207,208

You can mix types of entries, so you can specify all the bits necessary in bne
attempt. For example, this entry is valid:
._
208,1-7,50,53,55,6

e Do not enter spaces after commas, and do not end the entry with a comma.
7.

Delete feature bits from the FCOS copy, as desired.
Select:

(D)

Delete Features

Prompt: Features

to delete

(? for

help)

Response: The 1 eo 3-digit numbers

of the feature bits to be deleted.
rules apply to deleting bits as explained for adding bits.

8. Verify that the information
Select:

The same

you have entered so far matches your worksheet.

(S) Show FCOS

Prompt:
FCOS to
Response: The number

show

(? for

help)

of the FCOS copy that you specified in step 4.

9. If the information matches your worksheet, customization is completed and you can
save it. If the information does not match your worksheet, make the necessary
corrections.
10. After verifying that your entries are correct, save the customized
from the Feature Class of Service Menu.

Dar Fkv. A

FCOS by exiting

Modify

or Renumber

a Default

FCOS

VoiceMemo

Page 1 of 3
Release 6.OA and later

This procedure describes how to customize an FCOS by modifying one of the default
FCOSs supplied by Centigram or by renumbering one of these default FCOSs.
Reference

step

Modifying

the Default

Itself

1. Choose the default FCOS you wish to modify.
2. Complete

VoiceMemo
Tgerence and
=bnj&ration
2lanzlaL

an FCOS Worksheet.

Reach the System Configuration
Menu, then go to the Feature Class of Service
Menu. Enter the requested information, as described in the following steps, from
your completed FCOS Worksheet.

Note:

vienu Map 11

You can quit at any point in the following steps before you exit the
Feature Class of Service Menu. Quitting discards all entries you
have made and leaves the FCOS settings the way they were before
you reached the Feature Class of Service Menu.

To quit:
Make sure the Feature Class of Service Menu is displayed (short form or long f&m).
Select:
(Ql Quit-- Forget Changes
Prompt:
Quit and forget
changes?
Response: Y for yes

(y/n)

Specify the default FCOS to modify.
Select:
prompt:

FCOS to modify
=
Response: The number (1- 17,2 l-24) of the default FCOS.
5.

Change the name if desired.
Sekct:
f’rompt:

(N) Name FCOS

Enter

FCOS name (0 - 15 chars)

Response: Enter a descriptive name to accompany

the modified

default FCOS.

6. Add feature bits to the default FCOS, as desired.
Select:
(A) Add Features
Prompt:
Features
to add
Response: The 1 to S-digit numbers
l

(? for

help)

of the feature bits to be added.

Bits can be entered in any of the formats shown below:

Doe RN. A

CP 5008

Page 2 of 3
VoiceMemo Release G.OA and later
Reference

SFP
A single bit, for example 208
A range of bits, for example 202-208
A series of bits, for example, 39,40,207,208
l

You can mix types of entries, so you can specify all the bits necessary in one
attempt. For example, this entry is valid:
208,1-7,50,53,55,6

Do not enter spaces after commas, and do not end the entry with a comma.

Delete feature bits from the default FCOS, as desired.

a.
Select:
(D) Delete Features
prompt:
Features
to delete
(? for
help)
=
Response: The 1 to 3-d@ numbers of the feature bits to be deleted. The same
rules apply to deleting bits as explained for adding bits.

8. Verify that the information

you have entered so far matches your worksheet.

Selem

(S) Show FCOS
FCOS to show
(? for
help)
=
Response: The number of the default FCOS you have been working with.
prompt:

If the information
matches your worksheet, customization is completed and you can
save it. If the information
does not match your worksheet, make the necessary
corrections.

10. After verifying that your entries are correct, save the modified
exiting from the Feature Class of Service Menu.

a38 Renumbering
-

a Default

default FCOS by

FCOS

1. Choose the default FCOS you wish to renumber. (Renumbering a default FCOS
does not destroy the original default FCOS; the original default FCOS can be
restored through the Use Template FCOS option in the Feature Class of Service
Menu.)
2.

Complete

Dar Rm. A

an FCOS Worksheet.

VbiceMemo
Rqhence and
Configzrration
Manual

VoiceMemo

CP 5008
Page3of3
Release 6.OA and later

step
3.

Reference

Reach the System Configuration
Menu, then go to the Feature Class of Service
Menu. Enter the requested information, as described in the following steps, from
your completed FCOS Worksheet.

Note:

tienu Map 11

You can quit at any point in the following steps before you exit
the Feature Class of Service Menu. Quitting discards all entries
you have made and leaves the FCOS settings the way they were
before you reached the Feature Class of Service Menu.

To quit:
Make sure the Feature Class of Service Menu is displayed (short form or long focm).
Select:

prompt: Quit

Quit- Forget

Changes

and forget

changes?

(y/n)

Response: Y for yes.

Specify the new number for the FCOS.
Select:

FCOS

prompt: FCOS to modify

Response: The new FCOS number

(18-20 or 25-64OJ.

5. Assign the chosen default FCOS to this number.
Select:
(U) Use Template FCOS
Pmmpt:
Overwrite
current
Response: Y for yes.

FCOS with

a template

(y/n)

The system displays a list of the default (template) FCOSs.
Prompt:

Choose

a number

(1-17,

21-24)

from

the menu:

of the default (template) FCOS (1- 17 or 2 l-24) that you
want to be assigned to the current FCOS number.

Response: The number

The system displays a confirmation that the default (template) FCOS just
specified has been renumbered. The default FCOS is now customized.
6.

Save the customized FCOS by exiting to the System Configuration

Menu.

Dot. &.

CP5011

Add or Delete Feature Bits

VoiceMemo

Pagelofl
Release 6.OA and later

This procedure describes how to add or delete feature bits in an FCOS.
Refmence

step

1. Reach the System Configuration
2.

Identify

Menu, then go to the Feature Class of Service Menu.

vlenu Map 11

the FCOS you want to add bits to or delete bits from.

Select:
Prompt:

(C) Current FCOS
FCOS to modify
=
Response: Number of the FCOS (l-64OJ you want to add a bit to or delete a
feature bit from, or just press Enter if the displayed FCOS is the one
you want.
3. Add the desired bits.
Sekct:

(A) Add Features

Prompt:
Features
to add
(? for
help)
=
Response: The 1 to 3digit numbers of the feature bits to be added.
l

Bits can be entered in any of the formats shown below:
A single bit, for example 208
A range of bits, for example 202-208
A series of bits, for example, 39,40,207,208

You can mix types of entries, so you can specify all the bits necessary in one
attempt. For example, this entry is valid:
208,1-7,50,53,55,6

Do not enter spaces after commas, and do not end the entry with a comma.

Delete the desired feature bits.
(D) Delete Features
Features
to delete
(? for
help)
=
Response: The 1-to-3-digit numbers of the feature bits to be deleted.
rules apply to deleting bits as explained for adding bits.
Select:
Prompt:

Confirm
Select:
Prompt:

The same

the additions and/or deletions to this FCOS.
(S) Show FCOS

FCOS to show
(? for
help)
=
Response: The number of the FCOS you just added bits to or deleted bits from. If
necessary, repeat the appropriate preceding step(s) to make corrections.
6. After confirming that additions and/or deletions are correct, exit from the Feature
Class of Service Menu to save additions and deletions.

Doe P.m. A

CP5015

Verify Configuration

Parameters

VoiceMemo

Page 1 of 2
Release 6.OA and later

This procedure describes how to verify the configuration parameters that have been
entered. This procedure can be used for any of these applications:
l

VoiceMemo

RS-232 Message Waiting

DID VoiceMemo

DTMF-to-PBX

Paging

Integrations

Message delivery

Lights

Message Waiting

and other optional features

Reference

SteD

All Applications

Except

Paging

and Message

Delivery

Request a configuration
Select:
Prompt:

’
tienu Map 9

1. Reach the Main Menu, then go to the Reports Menu.
2.

Lights

report.

REPORT OUTPUT ROUTING
(C) Console
(P) Console
(1)

Printer

(screen)
with
A

pause

(F) File...
(A) Append to file...
(X) Exit
(no report)
If

you need help

later,

type

COMMAND (C/P/l/F/A/X):
Reqonse:

C to send th e report to the console without pausing
P to send the report to the console, pausing as the screen fills,
1 to send the report to printer A*,
F to send the report to a file on the Series 6 server,
A to append the report to an existing file on the Series 6 server, or
X to exit report output options (no report).
* You can have one or more serial ports on your server with different
devices, depending on the configuration of your server.

DOG Rev. A

CP 5015
Page 2 of 2
VoiceMemo Release G.OA and later
Reference

Step
Prompt:

Biter
group nmibr
to display
(l-24)
or for all
Response: The number of the line group to which the application is assigned.
Examples of valid formats for this response are:
l

1 to report the configuration

14 to report the configuration

of line group 1
of line groups 1 through

1,2,4-7 to report the configuration
through 7
Press Enter to get the configuration

of line groups 1,2, and 4
of all line groups

The server shows the name of the application assigned to each group
specified and displays the parameter settings for that application.
3.

To make corrections,
value.

Save the corrections by exiting from the appropriate

@D Paging
l

go to the appropriate

and Message

If you are currently
Pagers Menu.

modifying

application

menu and enter the correct

application

menu.

Delivery
the Pager or Message Delivery application,

go to the

1 a View the configuration.
Select:

(S) Show Pagers

Response: The server displays the pager system number

(index number),
name, access code, and hold time for each pager.

pager

Check the displayed configuration for each pager system against your Pager and
Message Delivery Worksheet to verify that it is correct.

To make corrections, return to the Pager Systems Supported option, the Define
Pagers option, or the Other Features option then enter the correct values.

When your entries are correct, save the parameter settings.

If you are not currently modifying the Pager or Message Delivery application,
as for all applications described above.

Dot. RN. A

tienu Maps

proceed

tienu Map 7

cp
Install Optional

Feature With

System Online

VoiceMemo

5402

Pagelof2
Release 6.OA and later

The procedure describes how to install an optional feature with the system online. Be
sure the Optional Feature Diskette(s) and the Module Enable Diskette contain the serial
number(s) for all disk(s) in the system.

Note:

The serial number on the OneView Optional Feature diskette must match the
serial number of the hard disk on which OneView is being installed. If you
receive an error message about an incorrect serial number, contact your
support organization.

CAUTION!
If you are loading a revision support disk (RSD), do it after
completion of this procedure. Loading the RSD first, could create an
incorrect con&uration.
Reference

1. Reach the System Maintenance
Additional
2.

,Menu Map 12

Menu, then go to the System Maintenance

Options Menu.

Select the Add Optional

Feature(s) program.

Select:

(A) Add Optional

l+ompt:

Enter

Feature(s)

'Y' to add optional

features,

'N' to stop:-

Response: Y for Yes.

3. Install the optional feature.
Prompe

Insert
drive.
Enter

Optional

floppy

disk

Feature diskette, then press Enter.

After you have installed the Optional
to install another optional feature.

Feature software, the system asks if you want

Prompt.- Do you want to install
Response: Y to install another optional

N if you are done installing

another

optional

feature and continue
optional features.

The system automatically edits and saves the configuration
Additional Options Menu.
5.

Exit the VoiceMemo
Prornptz

Wait

in the floppy

any key when ready:

Response: Insert the Optional

Feature

Configuration

for

message

Offline

Menu.

waiting

feature?

from step 3,

files, then returns to the

You see the following

queues

prompt:

to be empty?

Response: N to continue.

Dot. RN. A

CP 5402

Page 2 of 2
VoiceMemo Release G.OA and later

step

Reference

6. The following

prompt

appears:

Prompt:
Wait for
Response: N to continue.

7. Exit to the VoiceMemo
Configuration
- Offline
8.

Duplicate
Select:

Dw. Rev. A

Configuration
Menu.

queues

- Main Menu,

be empty?

then go to the VoiceMemo

the active configuration.
(B) Duplicate Active Configuration

9. Exit to the VoiceMemo
Select:

paging

Configuration

(A) Activate Configuration

- Main Menu and activate the configurkon.

Menu Map 2

cl?

5700
Page

Shut Down a System

VoiceMemo

1 of 2

Release 6.OA and later

This procedure describes how to shut down a module or an entire Series 6 server. You
should use this procedure before turning off the power to a module, as the shutdown
command halts call processing in a clean and orderly fashion.

WARNING!
You should follow the policies of the site to warn users prior to the system
shutdown.
This process removes the system from call processing. Centigram
recommends that you perform this procedure only during periods of low call
traffic.
Reference

Step
4

1. Reach the System Maintenance
2.

Execute a shutdown
Select:
l

command.

(S) System Shutdown

The system displays the status of each line and the lengths of the message
indicator request queues.

WARNING! ! This
Type "shutdown"
Response:shutdown

prompt:

Menu Map 1

Menu.

If you have a multi-module

J'rompc modules

will
terminate
if you really

call processing.
want to do this.

system, specify which modules to shut down.

shutdown:

Response: a for all modules, or the number of a specific module (1, 2, 3, or 4).
You can select multiple modules by entering the IDS separated by
commas (3,4), or a range by using a hyphen (2-4).
l

The system displays the status of each line of the specified modules as “idle,”
“active,” or “stopped,” and updates the status every minute until all lines are
stopped. The system stops any calls still in progress after five minutes.

If you are executing a qftern shutdown, wait for the message waiting queue to clear.
If you are executing a mod&e shutdown on a multi-module
system, do not wait for
the message waiting queue to clear.
Prompt:
Wait for message
waiting
queues
Response: Y to wait for the queue to clear,
N to continue immediately with the shutdown.

to be empty?

When the system has taken all lines of the specified modules off-hook,
by asking if a verify is to be executed.

Perform
Offline
System
Verification?
Prompt:
Response: Y to execute the verify,
N to skip verify and continue with the shutdown.

it continues

(Y/N):

Dac. RN. A

a? 5700

Page 2 of 2
VoiceMemo Release 6.OA and later
Reference

step

Specify if changes to the status of each module are to be made.
Prompt:

Enable
or Disable
Modules?
Response: Y to change the status of modules,
N to keep the module status the same and continue
7.

at step 11

Ifyou answered yes in step 6, achartwith~e~ofeachmoduleisdisplayedand~~ehe
Module Maintenance Menu is displayed.

8. Enable a module,

if necessary:

Select:
(E) ENABLE a module
Prompt: Which
Module?
Response: The number of the module.

Disable a module,

if necessary:

Select:
(D) DISABLE a module
&-ompt:
Which
Module?
Response: The number of the module. If you are disabling multiple
disable the module attached to the console last.

J'rompt:

type

"disable"

confirm

your

modules,

request:

Response: disable

If you are disabling multiple modules, repeat step 9.
If the status of the module attached to the console was changed to disabled, the
balance of this procedure is not seen, due to the module resetting. The console then
resets to the Maintenance From Hard Disk Menu.
10. When you are done configuring

the modules, exit the menu.

11. The system completes the shutdown.
J'rompt:

****SHUTDOWN

COMPLETE****

The System Maintenance Menu is displayed. You can now either reboot the
module(s) or remove power to the module(s).

0cc.RN.A

cp
Add FaxMemo

to a Series 6 Server

VoiceMemo

6449

Page lof 1
Release 6.OA and later

This procedure describes how to add FaxMemo capabilities to a Series 6 server. After
completing this procedure, you must configure one or more of the FaxMemo
applications.

Note:

If your Series 6 server was configured with FaxMemo at the factory, the
fax cards and fax software have already been installed.

3
/I

WARNING!

Note:

This process requires the system to be shut down, resulting in loss of call
processing capabilities.
Centigram recommends that you perform this
procedure durine neriods of low call trafIic.
You can find TRs referenced in this procedure in the Centigam

&:eries G Technical

Reference Manual.

Step

&f- erence

@D Before

You Begin

1. Complete a FaxMemo Card Planning Worksheet for each module and fax group in
the system. Blank worksheets are located in Appendix A of this manual.
2.

Configure

@D Install

fax card jumpers.

Pay special attention

to the base I/O address.

CP5700

Perform a system shut down.

Turn off the power to the system.

Install the fax cards.

Turn on the system power. Allow the system to boot from the hard disk.

I'R1904

the Fax Cards

@D Install

CP7510

the FaxMemo

Load the FaxMemo

8. Add the MVIP

Optional

Software
Feature software.

fax cards to the Resource Manager configuration.

CP5402
TR 1935

Dot &.

Page 1 of 3

Configure

for Fax Mail

VoiceMemo

Release 6.OA and later

This procedure summarizes the steps necessary to configure for Fax Mail in Series 6
server. It assumes that the appropriate server hardware and software have been installed.
Reference

Step

Complete
manual.

the following

worksheets.

Blank worksheets are near the back of this

FaxMemo

Card Planning Worksheet

FaxMemo

COS Planning Worksheet

Fax Mail Mailbox

Worksheet(s)

Create fax groups and assign them to the line groups that will be used for the fax+
application.

Note:

You should define the fax groups on the currently
configuration.

3? 7512

inactive

If the line groups for the fax application do not already exist,
refer to the VoiceMemo Reference and Conjguration Manual
for procedures to define inbound and outbound line groups.
3.

Based on your completed FaxMemo COS Planning Worksheet, customize an FCOS
(by either copying an existing FCOS and adding bits, or by modifying a current
FCOS) to include bits listed below.

Note:

If you are providing users with broadcast mailboxes for fax
reception, you must customize one FCOS for fax users and
another FCOS for the broadcast mailboxes. If you offer
different levels of service to users, you might have to
customize more than one FCOS.

To modify

a current FCOS:

To copy a current FCOS and add additional

33 5011
ZP 5007

bits:

- 190 (receive fax messages)
- 191 (make fax messages)
- 192 (give fax messages)
- 193 (deliver fax to default fax phone number)
- 194 (deliver fax online)
- 195 (deliver fax to designated telephone

number)

- 196 (user changeable default fax phone number

for fax delivery)

- 198 (receive fax messages only)
- 199 (automatic

receipt for fax message sent)

Dot RN. A

CP 6450
Page2of3
ViceMemo

Release G.OA and later

step

Reference

- 200 (fax cover page)
- 203 (walkaway fax)
- 230 (deny change capabilities to cover page)
- 235 (add “from”

field to the default cover page)

- 236 (add promotional
- 237 (automatic

message field to the default cover page)

fax retrieval)

- 238 (end of session delivery)
- 239 (retrieve all unplayed faxes)
- 240 (receive fax on record time-out)
- 256 (enable fxed greeting for walkaway fax)
4.

Based on your completed FaxMemo
with these limits parameters:

COS Planning Worksheet,

customize an LCOS

- Maximum

number of digits allowable for fax phone number for fax delivery

- Maximum

number of fax messages per mailbox

- CNG tone detection length (recommended

7508

value of zero)

- Fax delivery retry frequency
- Fax delivery retry interval
- Played fax message retention
- Unplayed

fax message retention

- Urgent fax message retention
- Fax receipt retention
-

If you have MESA-Net installed on your server, reach the Network Class of Service
Menu from the System Configuration Menu. If you do not have MESA-Net, go to
step 7.

Based on your completed FaxMemo COS Planning Worksheet,
NCOS with these limits parameters:

Menu Map 13

customize an

- 10 (Make Fax Message to Network)
- 11 ( Give Fax Message to Network)
- 12 ( Answer Fax Message to Network)
7.

Based on your completed
for Fax Mail.

Dar Rev. A

Fax Mail Mailbox Worksheets,

configure user mailboxes

CP 7506

VoiceMemo

Cl?6450
Page 3 of 3
Release 6.OA and later
Reference

If some mailboxes use the default fax cover page and mailbox owners live in different
time zones, configure time zones for FaxMemo.

If desired, set billing rates for FaxMemo.

cl?7509

Set the rates for disk usage for fax messages.

CP4358,

Ch5

Set the rates for messages received.

04360,

Ch5

10. Verify that the configuration

a5015

is correct.

CP7002

11. Activate the configuradon.
c

Dockv.A

cp
Configure

for Fax Publishing

VoiceMemo

645 1

Pagelof2
Release G.OA and later

This procedure summarizes the steps necessary to configure for Fax Publishing in a
Series 6 server. It assumes that the appropriate server hardware and software have been
installed.
step
1. Complete
manual.

the following

worksheets.

Blank worksheets are near the back of this

FaxMemo

Card Planning Worksheet

FaxMemo

COS Planning Worksheet

Fax Publishing

Mailbox

Worksheet(s)

2. Create fax groups and assign them to the line groups that will be used for the fax
application. You can probably use a shared fax group on an inbound line group to
deposit faxes into the fax publishing system. You probably need a dedicated fax
group for callers to retrieve faxes, either online or by entering a fax machine phone
number.

Note:

3’7512

You should define the fax groups on the currently inactive
configuration.
If the line groups for the fax application do not already exist,
refer to the VoiceMemo R&erence and ConfigurationMand
for procedures to define inbound and outbound line groups.

3. Based on your completed FaxMemo COS Planning Worksheet, customize an FCOS
(by either copying an existing FCOS and adding bits, or by modifying a current
FCOS) to include bits listed below.

Z-P5011

To modify a current FCOS:

To copy a current FCOS and add additional

a? 5007

bits:

- 194 (deliver fax online)

- 195 (deliver fax to designated telephone number)
- 197 (fax on demand)
- 238 (end of session delivery)
4.

Based on your completed FaxMemo
with these limits parameters:

COS Planning Worksheet,

customize an LCOS

- Maximum

number

of digits allowable for fax phone number for fax delivery

- Maximum

number

of fax messages per mailbox

- CNG tone detection length (recommended

Cl?7508

value of zero)

- Fax delivery retry frequency

Dot Rev. A

Cl?645 1
Page 2 of 2
VoiceMemo Release G.OA and later

step

Reference

- Fax delivery retry interval
- Played fax message retention
- Unplayed

fax message retention

- Urgent fax message retention
- Fax receipt retention
5. Based on your completed
for Fax Publishing.

Fax Publishing Mailbox Worksheets,

The kinds of mailboxes that can be used for Fax Publishing
0

Tree

Chain

Greeting Only

configure mailboxes

Cl?7506

are:

Information
for creating these special mailboxes can be found in the VoiceMemo
Reference and Configtlration Manual.
6. If some mailboxes use the default fax cover page and mailbox owners live in different
time zones, configure time zones for FaxMemo.

CP7509

7. If desired, set billing rates for FaxMemo.
l

Set the rates for disk usage for fax messages.

CP4358, Ch5

Set the rates for messages received.

CP4360, Ch5

8. Verify that the configuration

is correct.

9. Activate the configuration.
10. To deposit the faxes into the Fax Publishing mailboxes, you must call the server
from a fax machine. Log into each Fax Publishing mailbox as the mailbox owner
(by pressing Q* before the mailbox number) and select Qy for user options, Q“F for
fax options, and then press Q? to leave a fax. When prompted, send the appropriate
pages into the mailbox. Repeat for each mailbox in your Fax Publishing system.
When a caller reaches one of the mailboxes, the server plays any recorded greeting in
the mailbox and then tells the caller to get ready to receive the fax online or input a
fax number to have the fax delivered.

Dot Rev. A

CT5015
Cl?7002

Configure

for Guaranteed

Fax

VoiceMemo

6452

Page 1 of 2
Release 6.OA and later

This procedure summarizes the steps necessary to configure for Guaranteed Fax in a
Series 6 server. It assumes that the appropriate server hardware and software have been
installed, and the hardware has been configured in the Resource Manager.
Reference

SEF
1. Complete
manual.

the following

worksheets.

Blank worksheets are near the back of this

FaxMemo

Card Planning Worksheet

FaxMemo

COS Planning Worksheet

Guaranteed

Fax Mailbox Worksheet(s)

Create fax groups and assign them to the line groups that will be used for the fax
application. You probably need a fax group dedicated to an inbound line group to
provide guaranteed fax services.

Note:

:I? 7512

You should define the fax groups on the currently inactive
configuration.
If the line groups for the fax application

do not already exist, refer to
the VoiceMemo Re$rence and CorySguration Manual for procedures to
define inbound and outbound line groups.
3. Based on your completed FaxMemo COS Planning Worksheet, customize an FCOS
(by either copying an existing FCOS and adding bits, or by modifying a current
FCOS) to include bits listed below.
l

Modify

an existing FCOS

:I? 5011

or
l

Copy a current FCOS and add additional

3? 5007

bits:

- 198 (receive fax messages only)

- 206 (fax delete)
- 207 (fax verify)
4.

Based on your completed FaxMemo
with these limits parameters:
- Maximum

COS Planning Worksheet,

3’ 7508

number of fax messages per mailbox

- CNG tone detection length (recommended
- Unplayed

customize an LCOS

value of zero)

fax message retention

- Urgent fax message retention

Dar RN. A

Cl’ G4.52
Page 2 of 2
VoiceMemo Release 6.OA and later

step

Refwence

mailboxes

cl? 7506

If some mailboxes use the default fax cover page and mailbox owners live in different
time zones, configure time zones for FaxMemo.

cl? 7509

If desired, set billing rates for FaxMemo.

5. Based on your completed
for Guaranteed Fax.
l

Guaranteed

Fax Mailbox

Worksheets,

configure

Enable message delivery.

Set the rates for disk usage for fax messages.

Set the rates for messages received.

8. Verify, that the configuration
9. Activate the configuration.

is correct.

Cl? 4358, Ch 5
8,

CP 4360, Ch 5
CP 5015
Cl? 7002

cp6453

Page 1 of 2

Configure

for Fax Broadcast

VoiceMemo

Release 6.OA and later

This procedure summarizes the steps necessary to configure for Fax Broadcast in a Series
6 server. It assumes that the appropriate server hardware and software have been
installed and the hardware has been added to the Resource Manager Configuration.
Reference

Step

1. Complete
manual.

the following

worksheets.

Blank worksheets are near the back of this

FaxMemo

Card Planning Worksheet

FaxMemo

COS Planning Worksheet

Fax Broadcast Mailbox

Worksheet(s)

Create fax groups and assign them to the line groups that will be used for the fax
application.
You probably need at least one inbound and one outbound line group
with fax resources.

Note:

You should define the fax groups on the currently
configuration.

3? 7512

inactive

If the line groups for the fax application do not already exist, refer to
the VoiceMemo Reference and Confguran’on Manuulfor
procedures to
define inbound and outbound line groups.
3.

Based on your completed FaxMemo COS Planning Worksheet, customize an FCOS
(by either copying an existing FCOS and adding bits, or by modifying a current
FCOS) to include bits listed below.
l

To modify an existing FCOS

5011

or
l

To copy a current FCOS and add additional

cl? 5007

bits:

- 122 (define broadcast mailbox)

- 190 (receive fax messages)
- 198 (receive fax messages only)
- 203 (walkaway fax)
4.

Based on your completed FaxMemo
with these limits parameters:

COS Planning Worksheet,

customize an LCOS

- Maximum

number

of digits allowable for fax phone number

- Maximum

number

of fax messages per mailbox

- CNG tone detection

length (recommended

Cl? 7508

for fax delivery

value of zero)

- Fax delivery retry frequency
- Fax delivery retry interval

Dar RN. A

Cl'6453
Page 2 of 2
VoiceMemo Release 6.OA and later
Reference

Step
- Played fax message retention
- Unplayed fax message retention
- Urgent fax message retention
- Fax receipt retention
5.

Based on your completed
for Fax Broadcast.

If some mailboxes use the default fax cover page and mailbox owners live in different
8.
time zones, configure time zones for FaxMemo.

If desired, set billing rates for FaxMemo.

Fax Broadcast Mailbox Worksheets,

configure

mailboxes

Cl?7506
CP7509

Set the rates for disk usage for fax messages.

CP4358,Ch5

Set the rates for messages received.

CP4360,Ch 5

Verify that the configuration

is correct.

9. Activate the configuration.

10. For each Fax Broadcast mailbox create distribution

list 1 containing the recipients
for faxes sent to that mailbox. Recipients can include local mailboxes, remote
mailboxes on other Series 6 servers connected by a MESA-Net network, or outdial
telephone numbers.

Dot RN. A

cl?5015
Cl?7002

cp
Set Up a Company

Fax Cover Page

This procedure summarizes the steps necessary to
assumes that the appropriate server hardware and
have a different fax cover page for each line group
mailbox to each line group and storing a different
mailbox.

Note:

VoiceMemo

6454

Page 1 of 1
Release b.OA and later

set up a company fax cover page. It
software have been installed. You can
by assigning a unique administrator’s
cover page in each administrator’s

If you enter a company fax cover page, it takes precedence over
the default cover page and does not include the dynamic
information provided on the default cover page.

1. Plan the layout of the cover page on an 8.5 by 1 I -inch page.
Be sure to include:
l

Company

name

Address

Telephone

Fax number.

number

2. Make sure that the administrator’s
page) enabled.

mailbox has an FCOS with the bit 200 (fax cover

3. Dial into the system administrator’s mailbox from a fax phone and reach the User
Options Menu. Press a 3 for Fax Delivery Options, then Q‘? for Fax Cover Page.
When prompted, fax the cover page into the mailbox.

Dot RN. A

CP
Activate the Inactive

Configuration

VoiceMemo

7002

Page 1 of 1
Release 6.OA and later

This procedure describes how to activate a configuration.

WARNING!
This procedure causes the server to restart all tasks resulting in an
interruption to call processing. Centigram recommends that you perform
this procedure during periods of low call traffic.

step

Reference

1. Reach the VoiceMemo Configuration
Active Configuration
Menu.

Main Menu,

then go to the VoiceMemo

Menu Map 2
5

2. Activate the inactive configuration.
Select:

(A) Activate Configuration

pr0mpt: Activate

the inactive

configuration,

Response: Y to activate the configuration,

N to cancel the process.

pr0m.t:

Wait

for

message

waiting

Response: Y to warn system users of the impending
N to skip the warning.

queues
shutdown,

to be empty?
or

The server automatically shuts down and resets the software to the new
configuration,
then returns to the VoiceMemo Active Configuration
Menu.
l

If the server experiences problems with the new configuration,
to the old configuration by repeating the preceding steps.

you can return

Dot. Rzv. A

Configure

a Mailbox

for FaxMemo

VoiceMemo

Page 1 of 4
Release 6.OA and later

This procedure describes how to configure those parameters in a mailbox setup that
affect FaxMemo.

Reach the Mailbox Maintenance Menu. Enter the requested information,
described in the following steps, from your completed FaxMemo Mailbox
Worksheet(s).

Identify

the mailbox to be created or modified.

Select:
(C) Create New Mailboxes
prompt:
Mailbox
to create:
Response: Number of the new mailbox you want to configure for paging.

Select:

(M)

Modify

Mailboxes

Prompp Mailbox
Response: Number

Note:

to modify:
of the existing mailbox you want to reconfigure

Press Enter until the Features Class of Service prompt appears.

Assign an FCOS customized for the FaxMemo

Prompt: Features

class

5. Assign the appropriately

Limits

class

6. Assign the appropriately

prompt:

Network

Response: The number

service:

of the LCOS (l-640)

that includes the applicable limits.

customized RCOS to the mailbox.

Restriction

If you have MESA-Net,

that the mailbox uses.

customized LCOS to the mailbox.

Response: The number

applications

service:
of the FCOS (l-640) that includes the applicable bits.

Response: The number

prompt:

for paging.

The prompts are almost the same for creating a new mailbox and
modifying an existing one, except that “New” precedes each
prompt when you select Modify Mailboxes.

prompt:

class

service:

of the RCOS (l-64)

that includes the applicable limits.

assign the appropriately

class

customized NCOS to the mailbox.

of service:

of the NCOS

(l-64) that includes the applicable limits.

For Guaranteed Fax, set up message delivery to the target fax machine.
mailbox is not used for Guaranteed Fax, skip to step I I.
f’rompt:
Message
Response: 5

Waiting

Type #l:

or Message Waiting

If this

Type #2:

Doe RN. A

page 2 of4
VoiceMemo

Release 6.OA and later
Reference

Pager access type:
Prompt:
Response: The letter of the index to be used for delivery to a fax machine.

The

valid choices are:
I
B
U
N
Prompt:

Internal outcall index
Billed outcall index
Non-billed outcall index
Undefined index

Pager

number:

Response: The phone number
prompt:

Post-pager

of the target fax machine.

number:

Response: Leave blank if desired, or enter any overflow

from the pager number that

did not fit in the page number field.

Note:

There is no need to set the pager frequency or pager interval for
Guaranteed Fax; those functions are controlled by LCOS settings.

9. For Guaranteed

Fax, activate message delivery.

prompt:
Message
Response: Y

delivery:

10. For Guaranteed Fax, schedule fax delivery.
prompt:
Pager start
time
Response: The time at which fax delivery is to start. Enter the time in hours and

minutes followed by “am” or “pm, n for example 6:OOpm. To have fax
delivery enabled for all times, set both Pager start time and Pager stop
time to the same value, such as 12:OOam.
prompt:
Pager stop time
Response: The time at which fax delivery is to stop. Enter the time in hours and
minutes followed by “am” or “pm, ” for example 6:OOpm. To have fax
delivery enabled for all times, set both Pager start time and Pager stop
time to the same value, such as 12:OOam.

11. Specify the fax retrieval access type.
f'rompc Fax retrieval

pager

access

type:

Response: The letter of the index to be used for fax retrieval.

I
B
U
N

Internal outcall index
Billed outcall index
Non-billed outcall index
Undefined index

The valid choices are:

cl? 7506

VoiceMemo

Page3of4
Release 6.OA and later
Reference

12. Specify the default fax phone number.

This number is not used by Guaranteed

Fax.

Default
telephone
number
for
fax
retrieval:
Response: The default number (1-l G characters) of the fax phone the fax message is
to be delivered to. This field can contain any additional characters
necessary for outdialing, from Table 1 at the end of this procedure.
prompt:

13. Specify the time zone offset for the mailbox.
Time
zone
offset:
Response: The number of hours difference bemeen the time zone of the mailbox
owner and the local time zone of the Series 6 server. Valid values are *
from -23 to +23. This number must match the offset of one of the time
zones set in the Time Zone Configuration
Menu.

prompt:

14. Press Enter to skip through each of the remaining mailbox configuration prompts.
After the last prompt, the system displays the mailbox configuration, then prompts
for the next mailbox number.
At this point, the parameter settings are saved and you can continue with mailbox
configuration or exit.

Dee Rx. A

Cl’ 7506
Page 4 of 4
VoiceMemo Release 6.OA and later
Reference

Step

Table

Dial String Characters

Character
3-9, *, #

Explanation
Keys on a standard pushbutton

telephone

digits should be dial pulsed (10 PI’S)

(

The following

Stop pulsing; resume sending DTMF

Pause for one second

tones
r.

A-D

Doe RN. A

Fourth column DTMF

keys

Go off-hook, wait for dial tone or other steady tone (pager go-ahead
or confirmation tone, for example), then do next item in string

Switchhook

Greet - Wait for a voice or computer

Hang up (go on-hook)

Wait for an answer supervision signal that indicates the receiving
phone has gone off-hook, then dial remaining characters after
receiving the signal. Valid only with four-wire connections, not
with loop start or ground start phone lines.

Start a new activity; do not go off-hook

Ring once

Go off-hook,

Switchhook

Go off-hook,

Play three seconds of the message for voice pager

flash and wait for dial tone
tone answer

do not wait for dial tone
flash, no wait required
wait for dial tone

CP7508
Page 1 of 2

Set Limits

for FaxMemo

This procedure

VoiceMemo

Release 6.OA and later

describes how to set the limits that govern FaxMemo.

Reference

Step
1. Reach the System Configuration
2.

Identify

Menu,

then go to the Limits Class of Service Menu.

vienu Map 1

the LCOS you want to modify.

Select:
I%mpt

Enter

Response: Number

of the LCOS you want to modify limits in, or just press Enter
if the displayed LCOS is the one you want.

Select:

(N)

Prompt:

Enter

Name Selected LCOS

name

for

selected

limits

COS

Response: A descriptive name for the LCOS, from 1 through

15 characters; or just
press Enter if the displayed LCOS name is the one you want.

Set CNG Tone Detection

Length

(Walkaway

Fax only)
tienu Map 11

Go to the FaxMemo

Set the length of time that the Series 6 server waits for CNG tone.
Select:
Pmnpt:

Limits Menu.

Enter

CNG tone

Length

detection

length

seconds

Response: The number of seconds (4-60) the server must detect the CNG tone.
For all sites except those with extremely noisy phone circuits, set this to
zero to disable forced detection and enable automatic detection.

Set Fax Delivery

Go to the FaxMemo

Set the maximum

Limits

limits
Menu Map 1 I

Menu.

phone number

length for deilvering fax messages.

Select:
Prompt.-

(A) Maximum Number of Digits for Telephone Number
Enter
maximum
phone
number
length
for fax delivery
Response: The maximum number of digits (l-24) allowed in the fax phone
number for fax delivery.

Set the number of times the server attempts to deliver a fax.

Select:

(D) Fax Delivery

Prompt:

Enter

number

Retry Frequency

retries

Response: The number of retry attempts
8.

Set the number

for

fax

delivery

(O-255) the server makes to deliver a fax.

of minutes between fax delivery retries.

Sekxt:

(E) Fax Delivery Retry Interval

Prompt:

Enter
retries

number

Response: The number of minutes

minutes

between

fax

deliver-y

(O-255) the server waits between between fax

delivery retires.
Dac. RN. A

(37508
Page 2 of 2
VoiceMemo Release 6.OA and later
Reference

QED

Set Fax Storage

9. Go to the FaxMemo

limits
vlenu Map 11

Limits Menu.

10. Set the maximum number of faxes allowed to be stored in a mailbox.
Select:
prompt:

(B) FaxMemo Message Count
Enter
maximum number
of fax messages
Response: The maximum number of faxes (O-73) allowed

allowed

or
0 (zero) or a period (.) to allow an unlimited
stored.

number of faxes to be
denu Map 11

11. Go to the Message Retention Limits Menu.
12. Set the number of hours the server retains played fax messages.
Select:
prompt:

(A) Played Fax Message Retention

Enter

hours

to keep played

fax messages

of hours (o-8760) a played fax message is kept, if not
deleted by the user.

Response: The number

13. Set the number of hours the server retains unplayed fax messages.
Select:

(B) Unplayed

prompt:

Enter

Fax Message Retention

hours

to keep unplayed

Response: The number of hours (o-8760)

fax messages

a unplayed fax message is kept.

14. Set the number of hours the server retains urgent fax messages.
Select:
Prompt:

Enter

hours

to keep urgent

Response: The number of hours (o-8760)

fax messages

a urgent fax message is kept.

15. Set the number of hours the server retains fax receipts.
Select:
prompt:

(D) Fax Receipt Retention

ELnter hours

Response: The number

to keep receipts

of hours (o-8760) a f ax receipt is kept, if not deleted by the

user.

16. Save the modified limits by exiting to the System Configuration

Dot RN. A

Menu.

CP7509

Configure

Time Zones fo,r FaxMemo

VoiceMemo

Page 1 of 2
Release 6.OA and later

This procedure describes how to configure time zones so that the correct time stamp
appears on the default cover page of outgoing faxes.
Note:

The server does not put a time stamp on company cover pages or personal cover
pages. If your FaxMemo applications do not use default cover pages, you do
not need to configure time zones.

Step
1. Reach the Time Zone Configuration
Additional Options Menu.
2.

vienu Map 12

Identify the time zone that you want to configure.
Select:

(A) Current time zone

prompt: Enter

timezone

Response: The number

Note:

Menu from the System Maintenance

(l-26)

number

to modify:

of the time zone that you want to configure.

Time zone 1 is automatically used as the local time zone for
the Series 6 server. Be sure to configure a name for time
zone 1, but do not configure an offset.

Set the number of hours difference (offset) from the local time zone of the Series 6
server.
Note:

Select:

Each mailbox also has a Time Zone Offset parameter. When sending
a fax from a mailbox that uses a default cover page, the server looks
for a time zone configured here that matches the offset in the
mailbox. The server prints the name of the matching time zone on
the default cover page.
(B) Set current time zoneoffset

Prompt: Enter

time

zone offset

(3 char):

Response: The number of hours difference

between the time zone of the Series 6
server and the time zone of the mailbox owner. Valid values are -23 to
+23.

Enter a name for the time zone.
Select:

Prompt: Enter

time

zone name:

Response: A name (up to 35 characters) that identifies

the time zone. You can use
the full time zone name, such as Pacific Standard Time, or an
abbreviation, such as PST.

5. Repeat steps 2 through 4 until you have set values for all time zones used by
mailbox owners.

Dot RN. A

cl? 7509
Page 2 of 2
VoiceMemo Release G.OA and later
Reference

Step
6. Verify the settings that you have made.
Select
&-~mpt:

(D) Display zone name
Time Zone
-----------------

Display
(A)
(B)
(X)

Show a time zone
Show all time zones
Exit

Response: B to see a table of all 26 time zones, or
A to see the configuration of one specific time zone.
7.

When you are satisfied with the time zone settings, exit to the System MainteQance
Menu.

Dot. RN. A

Define a Fax Group

VoiceMemo

Page 1 of 2
Release 6.OA and later

This procedure describes how to define a fax group and connect it with line groups.
assumes that you have already added the line cards and fax cards to the Resource
Manager configuration.

Re$rence

Step
1. Reach the VoiceMemo
Menu.

Configuration

Offline Menu, then go to the Fax Group

Enter the requested information,
as described in the following
completed FaxMemo Card Planning Worksheet.

If desired, use the menu options to show all defined fax groups and/or show
unassigned fax channels.

Specify the fax group number

that you want to define.

Select:

(G) Current Fax Group

f’rompt:

Enter

Response: Number

Identify

rlenu Map 13

steps, from your

a group

number

of the fax group (l-42)

to that you are defining.

the module for the fax group.

Select:

(M) Module

prompt:

Enter

of Current

Fax Group

module

number =
of the module (l-4) that contains the fax cards that you want

Response: Number
included in the fax group.
5. Add the desired fax channels.
Select:

(B) Add Channels to Current

prompt:

Enter

fax

channels

Fax Group

to add =

Respanse: The fax card slot number

(O-l 5) and channel number (O-8) that you
want to add to the fax group. Separate the two numbers with a colon (:>.
Any of the formats shown in the following
Ekdmp Le
*

10:*
8-10
V:O-10:2
7:0,8:1,9:*

examples are valid:

Specif;es

All channels in the given module
All channels on the fax card in slot 10
All channels on fax cards 8 through 10
All channels on the card in slot 9 through channel 2 on the
card in slot 10
Slot 7 channel 0, slot 8 channel 1, and all channels on the
fax card in slot 9

Depending on the Series 6 server model that you have, your server may
have fewer than 15 slots and fewer the 8 channels on a fax card.

D0CRN.A

Cl? 7512
Page 2 of 2
VoiceMemo Release 6.OA and later’

step
6.

Rejbence

Drop any desired fax channels.
Select:

(D) Drop Channels from Current Fax Group
fax channels
to drop =
Response: Channels(s) to remove from the current fax group; values and formats
are the same as described above for adding channels.

Prompt: Enter

Repeat steps 2 through 6 for each fax group that you want to define. Note that if
you have lime groups that have cards in more than one module and you want to give
those line groups fax capability, you must define a fax group for each module.
8.
8. Exit from the Fax Group Menu back to the Lime Groups Menu.

Select a line group that you want to associate (connect) with one or more fax
groups.
Select:

(G) Current Group

prompt: Enter
Response: Number

a group

number =
of the line group (142) to that you want to connect with fax

groups.
10. Identify

the fax group(s) to associate with the line group.

Select:

prompt:

Line

group

Module

(where x is the line group that you selected in step 9, and y is the first
number of the first module that has voice ports in line group x.)
Response: Number of the fax group (142) to that you want to connect with the
line group. You can connect a fax group with more than one line group.
The system requests a fax group number for every module that has voice ports in the
line group.
-

11. Repeat steps 9 through 10 for each line group that you want to associate with fax
groups.
12. Exit to the VoiceMemo

Dar Rev. A

Configuration

Offline

Menu, saving the changes.

Software

Configuration

Planning

This chapter is designed to help you plan the changes that you must make to your
software configuration
when you add FaxMemo applications to your Series 6 server.
It describes all of the software options for FaxMemo, and explains how they are used
in the various applications.

Planning

Your

FaxMemo

Configuration

Before you can configure any FaxMemo applications, you must first assign fax
groups to any line groups that will carry fax traffic. You can then plan and configure
the applications you choose to enable, including any of the following tasks:
l

Assign fax options to existing classes of service (COSs)

Update current mailboxes and create fax broadcast mailboxes
required) for each new FaxMemo user

Create Fax Publishing

Create and configure

Create master fax distribution

Create and store a company fax cover page

mailbox trees and/or chains
Guaranteed

Fax mailboxes

(broadcast) lists

Each of these tasks is covered in detail under the application

(if

name.

Off line Configuration
After you install the FaxMemo cards but before you assign fax features to COSs, you
must create fax groups and then associate (connect) the fax groups with line groups.
The FaxMemo Card Planning Worksheet from the previous chapter has spaces for
the information
that you need. Use the most recent Configuration
Report to
determine which line groups to connect with fax groups.

FaxMemo

Classes

of Service

(COSs)

The system administration
menus contain FaxMemo configuration
parameters for
feature, limit, and network classes of service (FCOS, LCOS, and NCOS). All of

4-1

Sofmwe Configuration Planning

these options are described below. Read through their descriptions before
completing the remaining worksheets. Some of the options are similar to those for
voice messaging, but some are unique to fax handling. When you assign a FaxMemo
feature to a mailbox, the appropriate user and outside caller prompts are enabled
automatically. The voice prompts are described in the User Guidefor VoiceMemo
and FaxMemo.

Fax Features
The feature bits described below are included with FaxMemo.

190

Receive fax messages

(master feature)

This feature allows a mailbox to receive fax messages. When callers reach the
mailbox, they are first prompted to leave a voice message, then prompted to press L
to leave a fax with the voice message. Callers can ignore the message prompt and
press L to leave a fax without a voice coversheet. When the user accesses the
mailbox, the user is informed that there is a message with a fax there and given
options to retrieve the fax online or direct the fax to a fax machine after hearing the
voice message.

Note:

The mailboxes must also include one or more of the fax delivery
features (193, 194,195, 237) to permit the users to retrieve faxes
stored in the mailboxes.
If feature bit 240 is enabled, callers do not needto press L to begin
sending a fax; the system will detect an incoming fax when it does
not hear speech.

191

Make

fax messages

When this feature is assigned to a mailbox, the mailbox owner can make a voice
message, and then press L to leave a fax with the message. The fax is then delivered
to the addressed party or parties with the voice message.

192

Give fax messages
This FaxMemo feature allows users who are able to receive faxes in their mailboxes to
forward the faxes along with voice comments directly to other users or to outside
lines. They cannot include another fax as a comment.

Note:

4-2

This feature requires feature bit 190.

Software

193

Deliver

fax to default

fax phone

Configuration

Planning

number

This feature allows a user to have faxes delivered to a personal (default) fax telephone
number after listening to the voice annotation.
This number can be a department or
company fax machine and is entered by the system administrator
during
configuration.
When the user selects this option, another menu is played giving
further options to schedule delivery, cancel delivery, or deliver the fax now.

Note:

194

Deliver

This feature requires bit 190. The system must have a fax group
connected to an outbound line group to deliver faxes to phone
numbers.

fax online

This feature permits users accessing their mailboxes from a fax phone to receive
stored faxes online.

Note:

195

Deliver

This feature requires feature bit 190. The system must have a fax
group connected to an inbound line group to deliver faxes online.

fax to designated

telephone

number

When this feature is included in a mailbox and the user wishes to retrieve a fax or
deliver it to someone else after listening to the voice annotation, the prompt
Press I to input a number for this fm
is included in the fax transmittal options menu. After the user selects I and inputs
the number, another menu is played giving the choices of scheduling the delivery,
canceling it, or having the fax delivered now.

Note:

196

This feature requires bit 190 for fax functionality
and bit 95 to
schedule fax delivery. The system must have a fax group connected
to an outbound line group to deliver faxes to phone numbers.
Additionally,
a “fax pager index” must be set in the user’s mailbox.

User changeable

default

fax phone

number

for fax del’kery

This feature allows users to change their personal (default) fax delivery numbers
through the user options menu in their mailboxes.

Note:

This feature requires bit 1%.

Sohare Configuration Planning

197

Fax on demand
This feature is for Fax Publishing. When it is assigned to a greeting only mailbox,
the caller is greeted and given a prompt to get ready to receive the fax deposited in
the mailbox, either online or at another number. The mailbox LCOS and RCOS
control the delivery features.

Note:
198

This feature requires feature bit 194 and/or 195.

Receive fax messages

only

This feature prevents a mailbox from receiving voice messages and allows it to receive
only fax messages. It is used for both Guaranteed Fax and broadcast mailboxes in
Fax Mail. No greeting or prompts are played to the calling pyty and only faxes are
recorded. A fax session starts immediately when the server arkvers the call.
A Guaranteed

Note:
199

Automatic

Fax mailbox must have both this bit and message delivery enabled.
This feature requires feature bit 190.

receipt for fax message

sent

When this feature is included in a mailbox and the user schedules a fax delivery, a
receipt with a time stamp is automatically placed in the sending user’s mailbox.

200

Fax cover page
This feature causes the system to send a cover page with outgoing faxes. The cover
page identifies the user as the fax recipient at the company or department fax
machine. Mailbox owners can fax a personal cover page into their mailboxes which
th e system sends each time they retrieve faxes. When a cover page is deposited in the
system administrator’s mailbox, it becomes the company fax cover page and it is
delivered with faxes retrieved by users who do not have a personal cover page. If
neither a personal cover page nor a company cover page is available, the system
generates a default cover page.
If this bit is not enabled in an FCOS, the system does not send any cover sheet with
outgoing faxes.

Note:

4-4

Feature bit 230 disables the mailbox personal fax cover page option
so that mailbox owners cannot override the company or default
cover page.

Software Configuration Planning

203

Walkaway

fax

A mailbox with this feature is set to expect calls from fax machines rather than from
live callers. When a call is routed to a mailbox with this feature, CNG detection is
enabled while the mailbox greeting is playing. If the system detects fax tone, it
processes the incoming fax. If it does not detect fax tone, it plays the recorded
mailbox greeting and prompts. This permits callers to dial into a user’s mailbox and
immediately send a fax without a voice coversheet, and without having to respond to
prompts or monitor the call.
Feature bit 256 causes the system to play a brief introductory
fax mailboxes.

Note:

prompt

for walkaway

When feature bit 203 is active, the system listens@ fax tone
(CNG) in order to act like a receiving fax machine when the call is
initiated by a sending fax machine.
When feature bit 240 is active, the system always defaults to
accepting a fax when it does not detect voice. This is similar to the
function of bit 203. However, callers will hear fax signals if their
voice recording times out.
This feature requires feature bit 190.

206

Fax delete
This feature automatically deletes a fax from a mailbox after it has been delivered. It
is used in Guaranteed Fax to prevent resending the same message to the fax machine.

Note:

207

Feature bit 237 (Automatically deliver fax to default number)
overrides this feature. 237 is for user mailboxes, not guaranteed fax
mailboxes. Do not use both bits in the same FCOS.

Fax verify
This feature is assigned to Guaranteed Fax mailboxes which are on the same hunt
group as the fax machines. It checks incoming faxes with those already stored in the
mailbox to prevent the same fax from rotating through the hunt group and getting
stored in the mailbox again when the fax machine is down or busy.

230

Deny change

to fax cover page

This feature disables a mailbox owner’s ability to create a personal fax cover page. If
feature bit 200 is enabled, the system will send either a company cover page (if one
has been placed in the administrator’s mailbox) or the system default cover page.
This feature has no effect if bit 200 is not enabled.

4-5

Software Configuration

235

Planning

Display

from

field on fax cover page

This feature adds the “From” field to the default fax cover page. The field identifies
the system that the fax came from, such as, “ABC Communications
Fax Service.” It
does not identifjr the mailbox owner. The text of the “From” field is set in the Fax
Service and Promotional Message Menu.

236

Display

promotional

field on fax cover page

This feature adds a promotional message field to the default fax cover page. The text
of the promotional message field is set in the Fax Service and Promotional Message
Menu.

237

Automatic

fax retrieval

This feature allows the mailbox owner to have faxes downloaded automatically to a
preconfigured default fax number when faxes arrive in the mailbox. The fax or
voice/fax message is automatically moved to the saved queue and the message waiting
indicator is not triggered. This feature is intended to make it easier for mailbox
owners who regularly use the same fax machine to retrieve their faxes. The mailbox
owner can also enable or disable this feature from the user options menu.

Note:

When this feature is active, the mailbox owner should check the
target fax machine frequently, since fax messages will not activate a
message waiting indicator.
This feature overrides feature bit 206 (Discard fax message after
delivery). 206 is for guaranteed fax mailboxes only. Do not
include both bits in the same FCOS.

238

End of session

delivery

This feature is invisible to users. However, it allows the system administrator to save
on outbound fax calls. Instead of making an outbound call for each fax, this feature
enables the system to make only one outbound call for all faxes sent to the same
number during a mailbox session.

Note:

4-G

This feature requires feature bit 193 and /or 195.

Sohare Configuration Planning

239

Retrieve

all unplayed

faxes

This feature makes it easier for mailbox owners to get their faxes. If they do not have
automatic fax delivery enabled, they have the option to have all faxes concatenated
and sent at once. The user selects the “retrieve all faxes” option from the user
options menu and all the faxes are automatically sent to the user’s default fax
number.

Note:
240

This feature requires one or more of feature bit 193, 194, or 195.

Receive fax on record time-out
This feature makes it easier for callers to send fax-only messages and voice/fax
messages. In the case of fax-only messages, a caller can dial into ,a mailbox, press
start, and walk away. In the case of the voice/fax message, the caller does not need to
press L to send the fax.

Note:

When feature bit 203 is active, the system listens for fax tone
(CNG) in order to act like a receiving fax machine when the call is
initiated by a sending fax machine. Without bit 203, callers to a
mailbox must press L to indicate that they want to leave a fax.
When feature bit 240 is active, the system always defaults to
accepting a fax when it does not detect voice. This is similar to the
function of bit 203, except that the user does not have to press L
to leave a fax. However, callers will hear fax signals if their voice
recording times out.
This feature requires feature bit 190.

256

Enable fixed

greeting

for walkaway

fax

The feature bit causes walkaway fax mailboxes to play the prompt,
wait...” before playing the mailbox greeting.

“Press 1 or

Fax limits
The following

Number

fax limits can be included in limits classes of service (LCOS).

of digits for fax phone

number

for fax delivery

This limit restricts the user to the set number of dialing digits when retrieving or
redirecting a fax to a designated number. For example, 3 or 4 digits would only
allow faxes to be redirected to an internal extension, but 11 digits would let the user
send faxes long distance. If no digits are specified, then the number of digits defaults
to that entered for the outside caller dialing plan at the Online Configuration
Menu.

4-7

Sofkwxe Configuration Planning

Note:
Number

This limit works in conjunction

of fax messages

with RCOS Nl?A/NXX

screening.

per mailbox

This limit is the maximum
one time.

number

CNG tone detection

length

of faxes that can be stored in a mailbox at any

This limit is the number of seconds that the Series 6 server waits to detect the CNG
tone from a calling fax machine when walkaway fax is enabled (feature bit 203).
This limit should be set to zero except for sites with very noisy phone circuits.

Fax delivery

retry frequency

This limit is the number of times the server attempts to send a fax message until it is
successfully sent. The system retries fax delivery when it encounters ring no answer,
busy, or no available fax resource.

Fax delivery

retry interval

This limit is the number of minutes the system waits between retries on delivering a
fax message.

Played

fax message

This limit is the maximum
mailbox.

Unplayed

fax

fax message

This limit is the maximum
mailbox.

Fax receipt

of hours that played faxes can be stored in a

retention

number of hours that unplayed faxes can be stored in a

retention
number of hours that urgent faxes can be stored in a

retention

This limit is the maximum
mailbox.

4-8

number

message

This limit is the maximum
mailbox.

Urgent

retention

number of hours that fax receipts can be stored in a

Sofiswre Configuration

Fax Networking

Planning

Features
The following options determine a user’s fax capability over a MESA-Net network to
other Series 6 servers. These are entered as part of the network class of service
(NCOS).

Make

fax messages

to the network

This feature allows a user to make a fax message and send it over the network.

Give fax messages

to the network

This feature permits users to forward fax messages deposited in their mailboxes to
users on another system over the network. It does not allow users to make a fax
r.
message to the network.

Answer

fax messages

to the network

A user with this feature can reply to a fax message that was sent from another system
over the network. If feature bit 38 is activated, the original message, voice and fax,
will be sent with the reply back across the network.

FaxMemo

and RCOS
Like all other types of outbound calls, outbound FaxMemo calls are controlled by
the Restriction Class of Service of the sending mailbox. A mailbox owner cannot
have a fax delivered to a phone number that is blocked in their RCOS.

Adding

FaxMemo

Options

to COSs

Add FaxMemo options to mailboxes exactly as you would voice message options.
You can include them in existing or new FCOSs, LCOSs, and NCOSs. You must
generate new COSs for applications peculiar to FaxMemo, such as guaranteed fax
and fax publishing.
These are some fax mail FCOS options:
0

VII’ FCOS + 190-196 and 200
User can receive and send fax messages and include a cover sheet. Callers
must use the phone keypad to send a fax.

VII’ FCOS + 190-196,200,
and 203
Same as above, but callers can also send walkaway fax messages.

VII’ FCOS + 198 and 200

4-9

Software Configuration Planning

Fax only mailbox. This receives fax messages with no voice annotation
and supports a cover page. Use bits 193-195 to retrieve messages.
A sample FaxMemo COS Planning Worksheet follows this section. Blank
worksheets are in Appendix A for photocopying.
The Fax FCOS and NCOS
and names are included at the top of the worksheet for your reference.

bits

If you add fax features to an existing COS without renumbering the COS, the
existing mailboxes with that COS assigned take on the added fax features. If you
create a new COS by copying an existing one and modifying it, you must assign the
new COS to mailboxes (see “FaxMemo Mailboxes”).
Note that there are entries for users’ standard mailboxes and users’ broadcast fax
mailboxes. If a user is likely to receive many fax calls, he or she should probably have
a separate extension for faxes that has an associated broadcast mailbox. The
broadcast mailbox contains a distribution list consisting of only the user’s standard
VoiceMemo mailbox. Messages or faxes left in the broadcast mailbox are
immediately transferred to the user’s standard mailbox, as shown in Figure 4-1.
PBWCO

Series 6 Server

Voice calls to
ext. 1234

User’s
Standard
M#s!8tx
RNA/Busy

forward

F&f
messages

User’s
Broadcast
Mailbox
#1235

Fax calls to
ext. 1235

6’203FAx

Figure 4-1

4-10

Broadcast

Mailbox

Fax Mail

Application

Sofisvare Configuration Planning

FaxMemo
Fax Feature

COS Planning

Bits

Worksheet

Fax Feature

Bits (continued)

Fax NCOS Bits
Description

Number
10
11
12

CO% for User’s Normal
FCOS #to
Modify
10

New FCOS
Number
22

I
NCOS

to Modify
1

Mailbox

New FCOS Name

FAX Feature Bits to Add

VIP Fax

New NCOS
Number
1

Make Fax Message
to Network
1 Give Fax Message
to*Network
1 Answer
Fax Message
to Network

190,196,200,203

New NCOS Name
Network

Fax

FAX NCOS Bits to Add
10, 11, 12

FCOS for User’s Fax Broadcast
FCOS #to
Modify

New FCOS
Number

New FCOS Name

Mailbox
FAX Feature Bits to Add

Prepared By:

Date:

Configured By:

Date:

4-11

Softwue Configuration Planning

FaxMemo

Mailboxes
The planning and configuration
for mailboxes for each FaxMemo application is
slightly different. This section contains information
about mailboxes for each
application, and sample worksheets to help in planning.

Note:
Fax Mail

Mailbox

You can add Walkaway Fax to any of the other FaxMemo
applications by enabling the appropriate feature bits in an FCOS.

Configuration
The Fax Mail Mailbox Worksheet associates mailboxes with COSs. A sample
worksheet for this purpose is shown below. The worksheet section at the end of this
manual contains worksheets for photocopying.
List all the mailbox owners and their
current mailbox numbers on the sheet. Add the new COS numbers for the current
mailboxes. If you are going to use broadcast mailboxes, add those mailbox numbers
and the COSs to be assigned to them. Remember that the broadcast mailboxes must
be new boxes. If possible, use a numbering scheme for the broadcast mailboxes that
is easy for the users to remember when they need to give their fax numbers out to
callers.

Fax Mail Mailbox

Worksheet

Default Telephone
Number for Fax

4-12

Prepared By:

Date:

Configured By:

Date:

SofisvareConfiguration Planning

Fax Broadcast

Mailbox

Configuration

If you set up special distribution list mailboxes for fax broadcasting, use the Fax
Broadcast Mailbox Worksheet at the end of this manual. A sample worksheet is
shown below. Use one worksheet for each distribution list mailbox. Enter the
mailbox number to create or modify and the COSs to assign to it, then list the
mailboxes and owners’ names for the distribution (broadcast) list.

Fax Broadcast
Mailbox

No:

FCOS No:

6777

Mailbox

Distribution
Mailbox #

Owner’s Name

4212

Douglass

4256

Garcia

4235

Johnson

4354

5ojourner

4222

Budris

4343

Dayharsh

4274

Vilahu

5ales

Name:
LCOS No:

Worksheet

Fax Broadcast
NCOS

(Broadcast)

No:

list

Mailbox #

Owner’s Name

Prepared By:

Date:

Configured By:

Date:

4-13

Sofmate Configuration Planning

Guaranteed

Fax Mailbox

Configuration

For Guaranteed Fax, use the VII? FCOS with bits 198,206, and 207 and enable
message delivery. This mailbox delivers one copy of each fax message it receives to
your fax machine and deletes each fax after it is successfully sent to the machine.
A sample Guaranteed Fax Mailbox Worksheet is shown below. Blank worksheets for
photocopying are at the end of this manual. Fill in the telephone numbers in the
hunt group. For example, if your fax machine is on 555-3200, assign mailboxes to
555-3201,555-3202,
and so on. Enter the COSs for the mailboxes and the fax
number you want them to deliver faxes to.

Guaranteed
Fax Machine

NoJName:

4-14

Fax Mailbox
555-3200

Worksheet
5ales

Order

Enttv

Prepared By:

Date:

Configured By:

Date:

Software Configuration Planning

Fax Publishing

Mailbox

Configuration

For fax publishing,

you can use any of these types of mailboxes:

Tree
A tree mailbox routes callers to other mailboxes when they press one of
the keypad numbers. You must assign the proper features to the mailbox
(refer to the VoiceMemo Reference and Conj&ration
Man&k
create
distribution list 01 in the mailbox with the “go to” mailboxes in keypad
input order, and record a message in the mailbox directing the caller to
press specific keypad numbers for different information.
The “go to”
mailboxes can also be tree mailboxes, branching the caller further for
more specific information.
0

4
Chain
A chain mailbox accepts other mailbox numbers from the caller and
branches to them. Refer to the VCceMemo Reference and Configuration
Manualfor chain mailbox features.

Greeting with fax
This mailbox plays your recorded greeting and directs the caller to
receive the associated fax.

Greeting only
This type of mailbox can be used within a fax publishing and audiotext
application to give a voice only information message, such as the initial
welcome greeting to callers.

Fax on demand
Use a greeting only mailbox with bits 194, 195, and 197 to permit callers
to receive a prestored fax online or at a caller-designated number.

Fax only
A fax only mailbox plays any greeting and immediately prepares to
receive a fax. This can be used in larger fax publishing or audiotext
applications to allow the caller to input a fax message.

A sample Fax Publishing Mailbox Worksheet is shown on the next page. Blank
worksheets for photocopying are at the back of this manual. For tree and chain
publishing, you need a separate worksheet for each mailbox. Number the worksheets
and fill the sheet numbers in the “Continue on Sheet” or “Go to Sheet” columns, so
you can follow the progression through the tree or chain.
Write out the greeting, if any, that you want recorded in the mailbox. Enter a
description or title of the fax document you want stored in the fax transmittal
mailbox or attach it to the worksheet.

4-15

Software Configuration

Planning

Fax Publishing
Mailbox

No:

Mailbox

Type (Check

Tree

5223

Name:

Fax Publishing

Index

Sheet No:

Greeting

Only

Fax Only

@f Greeting

Chain

You have selected

the index of all documents

available

in the fax publishing

system

with Fax

LCOS No:
Tree

Greeting:

only one):

Chain

FCOS No:

Mailbox Worksheet

Fax Document:

Index

Prepared By:

Date:

Configured By:

Date:

So&are

Company

Fax Cover

Configuration

Planning

Page

The last item you need to plan is your company fax cover page. The cover page is
delivered with all faxes, except faxes from users who have their own cover page.
Layout an 8.5” by 11” page with your design. You should include your company
name, address, telephone number, and fax number. You can also add your company
logo and a short message indicating that the fax is from your company.
Fax the company cover page into the system administrator’s mailbox
from the
User Options Menu. You can assign separate administrator’s mailboxes, each with a
different cover page, to each outbound line group with fax capability.
If you do not enter a company cover page, the system sends a default cover page for
users with no personal cover page. The default cover page contains the mailbox
owner’s name, the number of pages in the fax, the time and date, and if desired, a
from field and a promotional
field.

Note:

If you enter a company cover page, it takes precedence over the
default cover page and does not include the dynamic information
provided on the default cover page.
If feature bit 200 is not enabled for a mailbox, the system does not
send any cover page with faxes from that mailbox.

Company

Fax Cover Page Worksheet

Prepared By:

Date:

Configured By:

Date:

4-17

Billing
VoiceMemo

list

Pagelofl
Release 6.OA Ld later

Procedure

Task

FaxMemo

Task

Reports

and Billing

Run a Fax Group Usage Report ................................................................

Cl? 5316

cl? 4358
Set Billing Rates for Disk Usage ...............................................................
Cl’ 4360
Set Billing Rates for Messages Received ....................................................

Dot RN. A

CP
Set Billing Rates for Disk Usage

VoiceMemo

4358

Page 1 of 3
Release b.OA and later

This procedure describes how to set low usage rates, high usage rates, and a high/low
boundary for Fax disk usage and other disk usage. The server uses these rates to calculate
charges when generating billing reports.
Rqbence

step

1. Reach the Billing Menu, then go to the Adjust%&g
2.

vlenu Map 9

Rates Menu.

Set the low usage rate for disk usage other than Fax disk usage.
Select:
Prompt:

(D) Disk Usage

Enter new rate (hit return to keep displayed
Disk use rates
low usage rate
($ n.nnn)
? $
Response: Enter an amount from $0.01 through $64.99,

value).
r.

or
Enter 0.00 to clear the current rate (you must enter two digits after the
decimal point when entering an amount or clearing the current rate),
or
Press Enter to keep the current setting.
3.

Set the low/high

boundary

for disk usage.

Prompt:
low/high
boundary
(
Response: Enter a number from 1 through

65535 that represents the number of
disk usage units at which the low rate changes to a high rate,
or
Enter 0 to clear the boundary
amount of usage,

and establish a uniform

rate regardless of

or
Press Enter to keep the current setting.

Doe RN. A

Page 2 of 3
VoiceMemo
Release 6.OA and later.
Reference

step

Set the high usage rate for disk usage.
Prompt:

high

usage

rate

Response: Enter an amount

($ n.nnn)

? $

from $0.01 through

$64.99,

or
Enter 0.00 to clear the current rate,
or
‘.

Press Enter to keep the current setting.
5.

If you want to set Fax disk usage rates, proceed in the same manner as just described
for other disk usage; otherwise, press Enter until the short form of the Billing Rates
Menu appears.

Exit to the Main Menu to make your settings take effect.
Select:

(D)

Disk Usage

PTOWZP~:Enter new rate (hit return to keep displayed
Disk use rates
low usage rate
($ n.nnn)
? $
Response: Enter an amount from $0.01 through $64.99,

value).

or
Enter 0.00 to clear the current rate (you must enter two digits after the
decimal point when entering an amount or clearing the current rate),
or
Press Enter to keep the current setting.
a
7.

Set the low/high

boundary

for disk usage.

boundary
(
n) ?
Response: Enter a number from 1 through 65535 that represents the number of
Prompt:

low/high

disk usage units at which the low rate changes to a high rate,
or
Enter 0 to clear the boundary
amount of usage,

and establish a uniform

or
Press Enter to keep the current sexing.

Dot. Rev. A

rate regardless of

CP 4358

VoiceMemo

Page 3 of 3
Release G.OA and later
Reference

Step

Set the high usage rate for disk usage.
Prompt
high
usage
rate
($ n.nnn)
Response: Enter an amount from $0.0 1 through

? $
$64.99,

or
Enter 0.00 to clear the current rate,
or
Press Enter to keep the current setting.
9.

If you want to set Fax disk usage rates, proceed in the same manner as just described
for other disk usage; otherwise, press Enter until the short form of the Billing Rates
Menu appears.

10. Exit to the Main Menu to make your settings take effect.

Dot. Rev. A

cp
Set Billing Rates for Messages Received

VoiceMemo

4360

Page 1 of 2
Release G.OA and later

This procedure describes how to set low usage rates, high usage rates, and a high/low
boundary for types of messages received. The server uses these rates to calculate charges
when generating billing reports. Types of messages received are:
l

User messages

Wakeup messages

Caller messages

Receipt response messages

Call placement messages

Future delivery messages

Urgent messages

Fax received, sent, retrieval, and
undelivered messages
Fax pages received, sent, and retrieved
messages

Reference

Step

1. Reach the Billing Menu, then go to the Adjust%&ng

Rates Menu.

Menu Map 9

2. Select the Messages Received option.
Select:
Prompt:

(M)

Messages Received

Ehter new rate (hit return to keep displayed
value 1.
user
messages
low usage
rate
($ n.nnn)
? $
Response: Skip to the desired messages received type, or set the rates and the _
boundary for user messages.
l

To skip to the desired messages received type, just press Enter in response to
the Low Usage Rate, Low/high Boundary, and High Usage Rate prompts
until the desired messages received type appears.
To set rates and the boundary
received type:

for user messages or any other messages

Stop pulse dialing; resume tone dialing

Wait for dial tone

Switch hook flash

Switch hook flash and wait for dial tone

Pause one second

Hang up (go on-hook)

Note:

Do not program a G (wait for greeting) into a PBX
Console
_
-_Attendant Day or Night Access Code, or into the Pre-DN string or
Post-DN string; internal Receptionist II programming does not
allow a successful transfer if a G appears in any of these strings.

The default dial string is “OH,” for both the PBX Console Attendant Day Access
Code and the PBX Console Attendant Night Access Code. This string means “issue
DTMF zero, then hang up.” For most PBXs, this is suflicient to transfer the call to
the Attendant.
The Receptionist
sequence:

2-6

II day or night dialing access code proceeds in the following

Configuring Receptionist II

Execute the Pre Directory Number (Pre-DN) dial string that is set under
“PBX Dial String Definitions”;
the Pre-DN string usually contains all the
instructions for the transfer.

Dial the appropriate

Execute the Post Directory Number (Post-DN) string, then wait for a
greeting (Receptionist II programming
always appends a G to the end of
the Post-DN string after a PBX Console Attendant Access Code has been
dialed).

PBX console attendant

access code

The default day and night console access codes are blind transfers, which
are available only if the PBX allows a blind transfer to the operator. A
blind transfer means Receptionist II releases the call before the greeting
starts. Instructing Receptionist II to release the call after dialing the
number ensures that the PBX does not continue the transfer when the
caller has decided to hang up.
If there is no PBX console attendant during the day, or during night/weekend
hours,
entering a period deletes the access code for that time period. When there is no
access code, the caller who “waits” (in response to the prompt, “Please enter a
mailbox number or wait”) is prompted to leave a message in the attendant’s mailbox.
(Receptionist II thanks the caller and hangs up if the attendant’s mailbox has also
been deleted.)

Flow

Options
The Flow Options
given calls.

Mailbox

parameters contain information

Message

Prompt

on how Receptionist

is to handle

Greeting/Name

The Mailbox Message Prompt value determines what message the caller hears if the
called party is not available. If the default value of G, for greeting, is chosen, the
caller hears the mailbox owner’s personal greeting. If N, for Name, is chosen, the
caller hears the prompt, “Please leave a message for [name recorded in mailbox] .” (If
no name was recorded for the mailbox, the caller hears, “Please leave a message for
] mailbox number] .“)

PBX Console

Operation

PBX Console Operation provides the option to specify that the initial welcome
greeting be replaced by a short dial tone to prompt the operator that Receptionist
is ready to receive the extension number.
PBX Console Operation is set to the default value of N when normal Receptionist
call processing is desired.

2-7

Configuring Receptionist II

CAUTION!
Do not change the default unless you specifically want to replace
greetings with a short dial tone.

PBX Dial String

Definitions
Receptionist II simulates the actions of a human console attendant.
Since different
PBX’s have different console operator protocols, certain coding must be entered into
the Receptionist II configuration file to tell Receptionist II how to process calls under
all the possible conditions, using signals understood by the PBF.
Pre-programmed dialstrings for eleven different PBXs: ROLM CBX, Northern
Telecom SL-1, AT&T Dimension, Mite1 SX, AT&T System 75185, NEC 2400,
Centrex, Fujitsu Focus, Hitachi DX, Telex 100 1, and Siemens Saturn can be selected
from the Online Configuration Menu . If the PBX at the installation site is not
shown on the menu, the dial strings must be programmed in the Default PBX
Options Menu.
The easiest way to determine the proper coding for each dial string is to attach phone
sets to three PBX extensions, one for the “caller,” one for the “called party,” and one
for simulating the actions of the PBX console operator, then follow the steps that are
given in the descriptions below.

Pre-Directory/Post-Directory

Number

Dial String

The “directory number” in the Pre-Directory/Post-Directory
Number Dial String
refers to the extension number associated with a mailbox number. The
Pre-Directory Number Dial String puts the caller on hold so VoiceMemo can dial
the PBX attendant. The Post-Directory Number Dial String is the number or letter
code that Receptionist II dials after the extension has been dialed. Table 2-2 shows
Pre-Directory/Post-Directory
Number coding choices.

2-8

Configuring Receptionist II

Table 2-2

Pre-Directory/Post-Directory

Code

Number
Meaning

Numbers

o-v, *, #
A through D

and characters on a standard DTMF

Fourth column DTMF
Start pulse dialing

Stop pulse dialing; resume tone dialing

Wait for dial tone

Switch hook flash

Switch hook flash and wait for dial tone

Pause one second

Hang up (go on-hook)

Number

keypad

keys

(

he-Directory

Codes

Dial String

The default Pre Directory Number (Pre-DN) dial string is “S+,” which tells the PBX
to do a Switch hook flash, then wait one second before dialing the extension number
(which may be a trunk number) that is in the mailbox. (Remember that
Receptionist II uses the Delete Digits table, and the Offset Table to transform the
extension that is input by the caller into a mailbox number, and then dials the
extension number that is stored in the mailbox’s data file.)
The Pre-DN string is also used with Receptionist II Console Access Codes. Before
the appropriate Console Access Code is dialed, Receptionist II executes the Pre-DN
string, then waits for the internally programmed greeting to be played.

Note:

Post Directory

Do not program a G (wait for greeting) into the Pre-DN string;
internal Receptionist II programming does not allow a successful
transfer to the console attendant if a G appears in this string.
Number

Dial String

The default Post Directory Number (Post-DN) dial string is “+,” which tells
Receptionist II to wait one second before taking any other action. This gives the
PBX enough time to make the connection to the extension. If no Post -DN dial
string is needed, enter a period.
The Post-DN suing is also used with Receptionist II Console Access Codes. After
the appropriate Console Access Code has been dialed, Receptionist II executes the
Post-DN string, then waits for the internally programmed greeting to be played.

2-9

Configuring Receptionist II

Note:

Do not program a G (wait for greeting) or a T (wait for dial tone)
into the Post-DN string; internal Receptionist II programming
does not allow a successful transfer to the console attendant if a G
or T appears in this string.
When an H appears in the Post-DN string, every call that
Receptionist II makes is a blind transfer. Receptionist II transfers
the call without invoking treatment types, connect strings, or
return strings.

Connect

Dial String

on Called

Party Accept

Receptionist II uses this dial string to connect a caller with the called party in the
following situations:
l

When call screening is not configured

When there is no mailbox associated with the extension dialed

for the extensi&

dialed

When a mailbox is configured for call screening, and the call is answered
and accepted by the called party

There is no default for Connect Dial String on Called Party Accept, since the
automatic release is usually sufficient to connect the caller with the called party. If a
dial string is entered, but later it is necessary to reset the value to “no string,”
entering a period erases the dial string.

Dial String for Return on Called

Party Refused

This dial string is used to reconnect to the caller when call screening is in effect and
Receptionist II has successfully connected with the extension, but the called party has
refused the call. The default Dial String for Return on Called Party Refused is “++,”
which tells Receptionist II to wait two seconds before doing anything else. The two
second delay gives the called party time to hang up his/her phone. For most PBXs,
this action is sufficient to reconnect the caller with Receptionist II. If no dial string
is needed, enter a period.

Dial String

for Return on Called

Party,

Busy, or RNA

When Receptionist II dials an extension, and the call does not go through because a
busy or reorder tone is encountered, or because there is no answer, or because silence
on the line indicates that the extension number is not valid, the Dial String for
Return on Called Party Busy or RNA is used to tell the PBX to reconnect
Receptionist II with the caller. The default dial string is “S+,” which means that
Receptionist II issues a switch hook flash, and then waits one second before doing
anything else. If no dial string is needed, enter a period.

2-10

Configuring Receptionist II

Special Actions

on Reorder

This dial string tells Receptionist
reorder tone is encountered.

Tone Encountered

II what to do when an extension is dialed, and a

Some PBXs return a reorder tone when an extension is set to “Do Not
Disturb.”
If Receptionist II is integrated with this type of PBX, enter “R’
for the Special Actions on Reorder Tone Encountered dial string. When
Receptionist II receives a reorder tone, it returns to the caller, says “I’m
sorry, [called party’s name] did not answer,” then follows the RNA
treatment of the called party’s mailbox.

A dial string can be entered to direct the call to an assistance number, or to
a number where the caller can report that the extension is malfunctioning.
r.

If no string is found here, Receptionist II treats the call like a dead line: the
Dial String for Return on Failure to Connect is dialed and the caller is
told, “That is not a valid extension number. Please enter another extension
number.”

There is no default Special Actions on Reorder Tone Encountered dial string. If a
dial string is entered, but later it is necessary to reset the value to “no string,” enter a
period to erase the dial string.

2-11

Configuring Receptionist II

Default

Settings

for Pre-Programmed

Dial Strings

Table 2-3 lists the default values in the Default menu and the default values for each
dial string group that is pre-programmed
for a specific PBX. These settings can be
modified.

Table 2-3

option

Defaul
t

SOLM
CBX

Default
NT
x-1

Values

ATT
Dil.ll.

Mite1
sx

for PBX Dial String
NEC
2400

Cen-

Hitach
iDX

IYelex
.

Siem.
Saturn

1001
+

Fl+

S+

F33

F30

(B) Pre
Directory
number dial
string /
Attendant
xfer string

s+*7

S+

S++

s+++

(E) Dial
string for
Return on
Called Party
Refused

s+*1

(F) Dial
string for
Return on
Called Party
Busy

S+

(G) Special
actions on
Reorder Tone
Encountered

(H) Dial
string for
Return on
Called Party
RNA

s+*1

(A) Post
Directory
number dial
string

2-12

Fujitsu
Focus

Groups

s++

s+s+

s++

F30

Configuring Receptionist II

Extension

and Trunk

Treatment

Types for Mailboxes

“Treatment types” are instructions to Receptionist II for processing calls to
mailboxes. Treatment types are configured for each mailbox that uses Receptionist
II. If no treatment type is configured, the Receptionist II default treatment is to play
the mailbox greeting.
Treatment types are either extension or trunk. Receptionist II offers 16 extension
and trunk treatment types, ten of which are defaults. The administrator can
configure six additional treatments.

Extension

Treatment

An Extension treatment type provides instructions for processing
incoming calls to mailboxes. The Extension treatment type specifies
whether or not Receptionist II should screen calls; menus options to
play/actions to take (1) when the extension rings, but there is no answer;
(2) when the extension is busy; and (3) when a screened call is rejected by
the called party.

A Trunk treatment type provides instructions for processing mailboxes
dialing numbers that are not answered by a person (long distance calls in
zones that do not require a “ 1” to initiate the call, for example). When
the number is dialed, Receptionist II either receives a response that
indicates that the connect criteria have been met or failure to connect.
When it receives a failure to connect response, Receptionist II then
proceeds with the specified failure treatment.

Type Parameters

This section describes extension type parameters.

Index Number
Each treatment type is represented by an index number. When creating/modifying
mailbox, the Administrator enters this number to select the treatment type.

Index Name
Each treatment type has an index name that corresponds to an index number. To be
useful, index names should adequately describe the treatment type. For example, an
extension treatment type that screens calls and plays redial menu M for all failure
conditions (Busy, RNA, Rejected) could be named “screeningiredial M.” Up to 24
characters are allowed for each index name.
When creating a mailbox, the Administrator
is prompted for day and night
treatment types. The online help text for these treatment types is a display of index
numbers, followed by the corresponding index names. For example, the ten default
treatment types have index numbers 1 to 10, and their names are Treatment 1,

2-13

Configuring Receptionist II

Treatment 2, and so on (see Table 2-l). The administrator
names to the default or new treatment types.

Authorized

can give more descriptive

Period(s)

The authorized period restricts access to a mailbox and to its associated
extension/trunk
number to a certain time period, such as daytime hours only. The
default authorized period is A (all). Other selections are D (day only) or N
(night/weekend only). Call ers who try to access an extension at a time that is not
within the authorized period hear the message “I’m sorry, that number is not
available for access at this time.” You set day/night hours in the Day/Night Menu.
This selection is not used for ordinary day/night treatment variations. The
Administrator
can select different day and night/weekend
treatment types to provide
e
these variations.

Authorization

Code

An authorization code requires that every caller enter this code to access the
extension or trunk
that has this treatment type. An authorization code is used only
for special circumstances, such as to restrict access to a modem, or to a WATS line.
Table 2-4 shows the characters that you can use in any combination
authorization code.

Table 2-4

Authorization

Codes

Code

Meaning

0 through 9, *, #
A through

within

Keys on an ordinary
Fourth-column

pushbutton

DTMF

telephone

keys on special telephones

The caller can gain access by entering any valid mailbox
number.

The caller must input a valid mailbox number and its
corresponding passcode

Up to 10 characters are allowed for each authorization
“blank” (no authorization code needed).

code. The default value is

Screen Calls
This parameter applies to Extension Treatment Types only. When instructed to
screen calls, Receptionist II asks every caller for his or her name, then puts the caller
on hold, calls the desired extension, announces the name, and gives the called party

2-14

Configuring Receptionist II

the opportunity
to accept or reject the call. The default value is Y (yes). Entering N
disables this feature.

Ring No Answer

(RNA) Treatment

The Ring No Answer (RNA) treatment tells Receptionist II what to do when an
extension rings, but no one answers it. This parameter applies to Extension
Treatment Types only. Table 2-5 shows the code choices for the RNA treatment.

Table 2-5

Ring No Answer

Code

Treatment

Coding

Choices

Meaning

Caller is transferred to the Attendant’s extension number that is
stored in the mailbox data file. If no Attendant’s &tension number
has been specified, the caller is transferred to the Console Attendant.

Caller is prompted

The redial menu that is selected under “Default Treatment on RNA
and Busy Calls” is played, and Receptionist II follows the caller’s
instructions.

to leave a message in the called party’s mailbox.

1The default vame IS K

Note:

If the Attendant’s extension number does not terminate in an “H”
(for hang up), and the call to the Attendant’s number does not
complete (due to Busy, RNA, Rejected, or Failure condition), then
Receptionist II looks at the Attendant’s extension failure condition
and follows the failure treatment that is specified for the extension
originally called.

Busy Treatment
The Busy treatment tells Receptionist II what to do with incoming calls when the
extension is busy. Choices are the same as for the RNA treatment. This parameter
applies to Extension Treatment Types only.

Reject Treatment
The Reject treatment tells Receptionist II what to do with screened calls that are
rejected by the called party. Choices are the same as for the RNA treatment. If R is
chosen, be sure to set the “Redial Menu to Use” (see the next section) to a selection
other than R. This parameter applies to Extension Treatment Types only.

Redial

Menu to Use

This parameter applies to Extension Treatment Types only. When “R” (redial) is
selected as the treatment for any of the failure conditions (RNA, Busy, or Reject),

2-15

Configuring Receptionist II

and the caller simply waits, the Redial Menu to Use offers the following options: R
(redial), M (message), A (assistance) and D (disconnect). The default value is M.
Table 2-G shows the text of each redial menu.

Table 2-6

Redial Menu Coding

Code
R

Choices
Meaning

Press zero for assistance
Press star (*) to hold for [called party’s name]; the system rings the
extension again every 10 seconds, but does continuously monitor the line
Enter another extension number or
wait to leave a message

Enter another extension number
Press zero to return to the Attendant
or wait to leave a message

Press star (*) to leave a message,
zero to return to the Attendant,
or enter another extension number.

Press star (*) to leave a message,
enter another extension number,
or wait for assistance

1Receptionist II hangs up after 3 tries.

Note:

Administrators may choose only one redial menu for each
treatment type; any failure condition where Redial is specified
(Busy, RNA, Reject) causes Receptionist II to play the same redial
menu.

Reclial menu R is not a suitable treatment for RNA or rejected calls, since a user who
rejects a call does not want the caller to instruct Receptionist II to continually redial
his or her number. When selecting a Redial Menu to Use for RNA and Reject
Treatments, M (Force to Mailbox) or A (Force to Assistance) are the appropriate
choices.

Default

Extension

Treatment

Types

Table 2-G shows the values for the ten default extension treatment
preconfigured in Receptionist II.

2-16

types

Configuring Receptionist II

Table 2-7
Index

Trunk

Treatment

Default

Extension

Name

Treatment

Types

Time
Auth
Code

Default

RNA

Busy

Reject

Screen

Treatment

Types
Like extension treatment types, trunk treatments types have an index number, a
name, authorized period(s), and authorization code. For a discussion of these
parameters, see the Extension Treatment Types parameters.
This section describes the parameters that are unique to trunk treatment

Connect

types.

Criteria

This parameter applies to Trunk Treatment Types only. The connect criteria are the
conditions under which a trunk call is considered to have connected successfully with
the called party.
The default value is C, for cut-through, which means that all trunk calls that are
outdialed ate considered to be successful. You must use this when the PBX cannot
provide supervision of outside lines.)
Other choices are T, where the call is successful if it is answered by a computer tone
or a dial tone; and R, where a ring-back tone indicates that the trunk call has gone
through.

2-17

Configuring Receptionist II

Failure

Treatment

This Trunk Treatment Types parameter tells Receptionist II what to do with a trunk
call if the connect criteria are not met. The choices for failure treatment are the same
as those for the RNA parameter for Extension Treatment Types.
A

Caller is transferred to the Attendant’s extension number that is stored in
the mailbox data file. If no Attendant’s extension number has been
specified, caller is transferred to the Console Attendant.

Caller is prompted

The redial menu that is selected under “Redial Menu to Use” (see below)
is played, and Receptionist II follows the caller’s instructions.
c.

Note:

Modifying

to leave a message in the called party’s mailbox.

If the Attendant’s extension number does not terminate in an “H”
(for hang up), and the call to the Attendant’s number does not
complete, then Receptionist II looks at the Attendant’s extension
failure condition and follows the failure treatment that is specified
for the extension originally called.

or Creating

Mailboxes

After completing the setup for Receptionist, the system administrator must modify
existing mailboxes or create new ones so that system users can use Receptionist II.

Mailbox-Receptionist

II Interaction

The administrator
with Receptionist

data for a mailbox so that it can interact

Receptionist

day treatment

Receptionist

night treatment

The extension number that Receptionist should dial when the mailbox is
called (the trunk number is entered here when applicable).

Note:

2-18

must enter the following
II:

Some mailboxes have no associated extensions. For example, the
mailbox that plays the “specials of the day” for a business is a
“greetings-only mailbox” for which you do not want to assign an
extension
An extension pre-dial index, when the extension number
number) to be dialed exceeds 15 characters

(or trunk

Configuring Receptionist II

Special

Mailboxes

An attendant’s extension number (and pre-dial index, if necessary); this
number is called when “assistance ” is chosen for any failure treatment.

for Single-Digit

Access

You can configure a single-digit access menu for Receptionist II. This menu allows a
caller to press a single digit to get to specified mailboxes. For example, the singledigit menu might provide the following choices:
l

To dial an extension, press 1.

For this week’s training schedule, press 2.

For a customer service representative,

press 3.

For this menu, you configure the Administrator’s mailbox as a tree mailbox that
allows the user to press a single digit to access other mailboxes. In the example given,
pressing 1 accessesa chain mailbox to dial an extension or dial by name. Pressing 2
accesses a greetings only mailbox that plays the week’s training schedule. Pressing 3
accesses a number answered by a customer service representative.
For instructions

on modifying

Rgerence and Conjpration

Receptionist

and creating mailboxes, refer to the VoiceMemo

Manual.

II Extensions
In an integrated Series 6 Server and PBX system, you can configure Receptionist II
to answer a call to the main company number. In addition to the main number, you
can configure other Receptionist II extensions to form a hunt group, such that if the
main number is busy, the next call goes to another Receptionist II extension.

Note:

You configure Receptionist II extensions through the System
Maintenance main menu option Automated
Receptionist
Extensions.

Receptionist

II Worksheets
This section provides information
worksheets are in the Worksheets

Worksheet

on how to use Receptionist II worksheets.
section at the back of this manual.

The

If Receptionist II is integrated with a PBX system, you may not have to assign a
separate line group for Receptionist II. Refer to the integration manual to determine
whether the integration directs you to assign a line group to Receptionist II.

2-19

Configuring Receptionist II

If you assign a separate line group for Receptionist II, complete both
Offline Parameters and Online Parameters sections of Receptionist II
Worksheet 1.

If the integration manual for the PBX switch at your installation site
instructs you to configure Receptionist through the integration
application menu, complete only the Online Parameters sections of
Receptionist II Worksheet 1.

The online parameters on Worksheet 1 are those that Receptionist II shares with the
VoiceMemo application. See the VoiceMemo Reference and Configuration Manual for
a detailed discussion of the parameters on this page.

Worksheet

Worksheet 2 contains parameters that are specific to Receptionist II software.
Complete the DeEa& options section only if the PBX switch at your site is not
listed in the preceding section, PBX Dial String options.

Worksheets

3 and 4

Worksheets 3 is the Extension Treatment Type worksheet into which you enter
frequently-used instructions for specific mailboxes. You might have one set of
instructions for managers’ mailboxes, another for customer support staff, and
another for sales representatives. Putting these instructions in a Treatment Type
allows you then to provide a customize mailboxes by using the Treatment Type,
rather than by individually configuring each mailbox.

2-20

Task list
VoiceMemo

Page 1 of 1
Release 6.OA and later
Procedure

Task

Installation
Feature Software .. . . . . .. . . . . . .. . . . . . . .. . . . . .. . . . . . .. . . . . .. . . .. . . . . . . .. . . . .. . . CP 5402

Install Optional

Configuration
Receptionist

II Configuration

VoiceMemo

Application

Add Receptionist

.............................................................

Configuration

II Extension Numbers

............................

..ue..............

................................................

Configure

a Tree Mailbox ........................................................................
Create a Single-Digit Access Menu ...........................................................

lest

Cl’ 6535
CP 3301

..C I’ 6536
03311
06537

Setup
Set Up Receptionist

II Test Configuration

. . . . .. . . . . . .. . . .. .. . . . . . .. . . .. . . . . . . .. . . .. . . . . . CP 6539

Tests
Test Intermediate

Attendant

Test Mailbox

Types ................................................................
II Setup ......................................................................

Treatment

Test Receptionist

Call Processing.. ..........................................

CP 6542
CP 6541
..C I’ 6540

CP3301
Pagelof2

VoiceMemo

Codiguration

VoiceMemo

Release 6.OA and later

This procedure summarizes the steps necessary to configure the messaging functions
Receptionist II.

Note:

CP references in this procedure are all in the VoiceMemo Reference
Conjpration
Manual.

and
Reference

Step

Go to the VoiceMemo
Configuration
Online Menu in the active or inactive
configuration.
Select inactive if you just made a chance through the Offline Menu,
or active if you did not.
Select:

(El Mod&

Active Confisruration

or
(FJ Mod& Inactive Confimu-ationSchedule company greetings. Use the Day/Night
l

Designate the start of the work day

Designate the end of the work day

Designate the weekend

Menu to:

Establish a dialing plan. If no star pref= is desired, use the Dialing
star prefix is desired, use the Star Prefer Dplan Menu to:
l

Specify the trigger digit if Dial-by-Name

vienu Map 2

Plan Menu.

If a

5024, Ck 1. I5

3? 5002, Ch. 2

is desired

or
l

Specify the signal digit if off-system messaging is desired

If desired, enable Call Placemen

CP 3306, Ch I 4

If desired, configure

CP 5020, Ch. 2

If any of the following

for transfer to a system attendant.
are desired, define an administrator’s

Master distribution

Company

Phone administration

mailbox:

CP 3303, Ch. 6

lists

greetings and alternate greeting

If any of the following

are desired, define an attendant’s

Collecting

or preventing

Message of the day

Site tutorial

mailbox:

CP 3304, Ch. 6

unaddressed messages

If desired, prevent unaddressed messages.

CP 5023, Ch. 2

If desired, er

CP 5022, Ch. 2

Dot. RN. A

a? 3301
Page 2 of 2
VoiceMemo
Release 6.OA and later
Reference

Step
10. Set a default language for prompts,

Cl? 3312, Ch. 6

if other than English.

CP 3309, Ch. 2

11. If desired, enable Dial-by-Name.
l

Code the dialing plan with an A in the digit position
about spelling the name.

Set the Dial-by-Name

Include feature bit 92 (user will be in Dial-by-Name
assigned to mailboxes.

12. Configure

that triggers a prompt

parameters.
database) in the FCOS

13. Verify that the configuration

CP 5015, Ch.

is correct.

14. If you chose the inactive configuration
at the beginning of this procedure,
the configuration
to make the parameter settings take effect.

Dac.Rm.A

CP 5021, Ch. 1C

the mailbox passcode parameters.

activate

CP 7002, Ch. 1

Configure

Pagelof5

a Tree Mailbox

This procedure
mailbox.

VoiceMemo

describes how to configure

Release G.OA and later

a simple tree mailbox and a nested tree

SteD

Reference

1. Complete a Mailbox Worksheet and a Tree Mailbox Diagram.

Blank worksheets

are at the back of this manual.
2.

Reach the Mailbox Maintenance Menu. Enter the requested information,
as
described in the following steps, from your completed Mailbox Worksheets.

@D Using the Scrolling
3.

Identify

vIenu Map 3

Interface

the tree mailbox.

Select:
Prompt:

Mailbox

Response: Number

create:

of the new mailbox.

or
Select:

(M)

.&mpt:

Mailbox

Modify

Response: Number

Note:

Mailboxes

to modify:
of the existing mailbox.

Prompts are almost the same for creating a new mailbox and
modifying an existing one, except that “New” precedes each prompt when you select Modify Mailboxes.

To leave an existing parameter
next prompt.
4.

setting unchanged,

just press Enter to go to the

Set the remaining mailbox parameters the same as for a standard mailbox,
the FCOS and GCOS.

except for

jbiceMemo
deference and
~obnfpration
Manual

5. Assign an FCOS designed for a tree mailbox.
Prompt:
Features
class of service:
Response: 15 (the default Tree FCOS),
or
The number of a customized
typical tree mailbox.

FCOS that contains all the features of a

If you want callers who do not enter a digit promptly after the tree mailbox greeting
to be routed to the first subordinate mailbox, include feature bit 120 (default to first
child of tree mailbox) in the mailbox FCOS.
If you want these callers to be routed to the kzst subordinate
feature bit

mailbox, include

DocRcv.A

cl? 3311
Page 2 of 5
VoiceMemo Release 6.OA and later
Step

Reference

6. Assign the same GCOS to the tree mailbox that is assigned to its subordinate
mailboxes.
Prompt:

Group

class

service:

Response: The number

of the GCOS (l-64) that contains groups shared by the
tree mailbox and all its subordinate mailboxes.

7. After responding to the last mailbox parameter, the system displays the mailbox
configuration, then prompts for the next mailbox number. At this point, the
parameter settings for the tree mailbox are saved.
8.

Configure the first subordinate
to through the tree mailbox).
Prompt:
Mailbox
Response: The number

mailbox (the mailbox that callers should be rou:ed

create:
or Mailbox
of the first subordinate mailbox.

Set all applicable parameters for the subordinate
mailbox, except for the GCOS.

10. Assign the same GCOS to the subordinate
mailbox.
Prompt:

Group

class

to modify:

mailbox the same as for a standard

mailbox that you assigned to the tree

service:

of the GCOS (l-64) that contains groups shared by the
tree mailbox and all its subordinate mailboxes.

Response: The number

11. Configure

all subordinate

mailboxes as just described.

12. Disable the tutorials in the child mailboxes.
press Enter to ship the other fields.

Change only the tutorial setting to no,

13. Create distribution list 1 for the tree mailbox just configured,
the subordinate mailboxes.

14. Record an appropriate

Dot. Rev. A

adding as members all

greeting in the tree mailbox and all child mailboxes.

VoiceMemo
Reference and
Con~guration
Manual
VoiceMemo
werence and
Configuration
Manual

cl? 3311
Page 3 of 5
Release 6.OA and later

VoiceMemo

step
CD
3.

Using
Identify

Re$rence

the Full-Screen

Interface

the tree mailbox.

Select:
(C) Create/Modify/Delete
Mailboxes
Response: You are placed in the Mailbox Maintenance
number of the new or existing mailbox.

entry screen. Enter the

Prompt:
Mailbox:
OOOOOOOOnnn
Response: Press FlO to edit the mailbox information.

Set the remaining mailbox parameters the same as for a standard mailbox, except for
the FCOS and GCOS. Use the arrow keys, Tab key, or Enter key to move around
the screen, stopping at parameters you wish to change.

5. Assign an FCOS designed for a tree mailbox.

Features:
Prompt:
Response: 15 (the default Tree FCOS),
The number of a customized
typical tree mailbox.

or
FCOS that contains all the features of a

If you want callers who do not enter a digit promptly after the tree mailbox greeting
to be routed to the&t
subordinate mailbox, include feature bit 120 (default to first
child of tree mailbox) in the mailbox FCOS.

last

If you want these callers to be routed to the
subordinate mailbox, include
feature bit 186 (default to last child of tree mailbox) in the mailbox FCOS.
6. Assign the same GCOS to the tree mailbox that is assigned to its subordinate
mailboxes.
Prompt:
Group
:
Response: The number

of the GCOS (l-64) that contains groups shared by the
tree mailbox and all its subordinate mailboxes. Or, use an affinity
GCOS (6532,000),
where the tree mailbox and all subordinates have
the same GCOS number.

Press FlO to save your changes, or, if you made a mistake, press F9 to cancel your
changes.

VoiceMemo
R4erence and
Confguration
Manual

cl? 3311
Page 4 of 5
VoiceMemo Release 6.OA and later
Reference

Step
8. Configure the first subordinate mailbox (the mailbox that callers should be routed
to through the tree mailbox). Follow the same steps as in configuring the tree
mailbox except as listed below.

prompt: Mailbox:
Response: The number

of the first subordinate

Mailbox:

prompt:

mailbox.

OOOOOOOOnnn

Response: Press FlO to edit the mailbox information.

Set all applicable parameters for the subordinate
mailbox, except for the GCOS.

10. Assign the same GCOS to the subordinate
mailbox.

mailbox the same as for a standard

mailbox that you assigned to the tree

Prompt:
Grow
:
Response: The number

of the GCOS (l-64) that contains groups shared by the
tree mailbox and all its subordinate mailboxes. Or, use an affinity
GCOS (G5-32,000), where the tree mailbox and all subordinates have
the same GCOS number.

11. Disable the tutorials in each subordinate

mailbox.

Tutorial:

prompt:

Response: N to disable the tutorial.

12. Save changes to the subordinate
13. Configure

all subordinate

14. Exit Mailbox

Maintenance

mailbox by pressing FlO.

mailboxes as just described.
(when done with all mailboxes) by pressing F9.

15. Create distribution list 1 for the tree mailbox just configured,
the subordinate mailboxes.

adding as members all

VoiceMemo
Re$rence and

Confi$0ation
Manzlal

16. Record an appropriate

Dot Rev. A

greeting in the tree mailbox and all child mailboxes.

CP 3311
Page 5 of 5
VoiceMemo

Release b.OA and later
Reference

Step

Nested

Tree Mailbox

1. Choose the subordinate

mailbox that you want to be a tree mailbox.

Configure the mailbox through
in this procedure.

the Mailbox

Maintenance

Menu as described earlier

Create distribution list 1 for the nested tree mailbox just configured, adding as
members all the subordinate mailboxes related to the nested tree mailbox.

VoiceMemo
Reference and

ConEguration
9

Record a greeting in the nested tree mailbox.

Manual

cp
Install Optional

Feature With

5402

Page 1 of2

System Online

VoiceMemo

Release G.OA and later

Note:

CAUTION!
If you are loading a revision support disk (RSD), do it after
completion of this procedure.
Loading the RSD first, could create an
incorrect configuration.

Note:

If you ordered Receptionist II with your Series G server, this optional feature
is already on your disk. Skip this installation procedure and configure
Receptionist II. To determine whether Receptionist II is installed, reach the
Configuration
option from the Reconfiguration
menu. The report lists the
applications on your system.

Step

Reference

1. Reach the System Maintenance
Additional
2.

Menu,

then go to the System Maintenance

Select the Add Optional

Install the optional
Prompt

Feature(s) program.

Insert
drive.
Enter

‘N’ to stop:

features,

feature.

Optional

Feature

floppy

disk

in the floppy

any key when ready:

Response: Insert the Optional

Feature diskette, then press Enter.

4. After you have installed the Optional
to install another optional feature.
Prompt:

lvlenu Map

Options Menu.

Select:
(A) Add Optional Feature(s)
Prompt:
Enter 'Y' to add optional
Response: Y for Yes.

Feature software, the system asks if you want

IX you want to install

another

optional

Response: Y to install another optional feature and continue
N if you are done installing optional features.
The system automatically edits and saves the configuration
Additional Options Menu.

feature?

from step 3,

files, then returns to the

Dar &xv. A

CP 5402
Page 2 of 2
VoiceMemo Release 6.OA and later
Reference
5.

Exit the VoiceMemo

Prompt: Wait

Configuration

for

message

Offline Menu.

waiting

You see the following

queues

prompt:

to be empty?

Response: N to continue.

6. The following

prompt

Prompt: Wait

appears:

for

paging

queues

be empty?

Response: N to continue.
7.

Exit to the VoiceMemo
Configuration
- Offline

Duplicate
Select:

Dot. Pa. A

- Main Menu, then go to the VoiceMemo
9

the active configuration.
(B) Duplicate

Exit to the VoiceMemo
Sekm2

Configuration
Menu.

Active Configuration
Configuration

(A) Activate Configuration

- Main Menu and activate the configuration.

Menu Map 2

CP
Receptionist

II Configur+ion

VoiceMemo

6535

Page 1 of 7
Release G.OA and later

This procedure sets the values for parameters that Receptionist II uses to process calls
and to interact with mailboxes. Set the parameters by entering the values that you wrote
on Receptionist II Worksheets 2 through 4 (see Chapter 2).

step
@ED Display

Re$rence

the Receptionist

1. Reach the VoiceMemo Configuration
Main Menu, then go to the VoiceMemo
Configuration
Online Menu in the active or inactive configuration.
Select inactive
if vou iust made a change through the Offline Menu, and have not yet activated the
configuration,
or active if YOU have already activated the configuration,
%
SeLect

(E) Mod&
or
/F) Mod&

Active Confkuration
Inactive Confirmration

Online

menu:

Prompt:
Response: Specify the line group for Receptionist
Select:
prompt:

vlenu Map 2

II.

(G) Group Selected

Enter

a group

Response: The number

number

of the line group (l-24)

or
Press Enter if the current number is correct.

Cj3

Set PBX Dialing

1. Reach the Receptionist
2.

Plan Options
Menu,

then go to the Dialing Plan Options Menu.

Change the dialing plan, if desired.
Select:
Prompt:

(I’) Dialing

Plan

Dialing

Plan

[3,3,3,3,3,3,3,0,01

Response: Change values to match those on Worksheet

vienu Map 13

2, as needed.

If the PBX on the site requires that digits be deleted for some numbers in the dialing
plan, configure the Delete Digits table. Consulting your worksheet, enter the
number of leading digits to be deleted in accordance with the dialing plan,
Select:
prompt:

(D) Delete Digits

Delete

Digits

[0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,01

Response: Change values to match those on Worksheet

2, as needed.

Dot RN. A

CP 6535
Page 2 of 7
VoiceMemo Release 6.OA and later
SteD
4.

Reference
If the site’s PBX require offsets in the dialing plan, define the tables that require
offsets.
Select:

(F) Offset Table

&umpt:

DIALING

PLAN:

Response: (D) Define Table
Prompt:
Define
table
number (1 to 9)
111
Response: The first digit (b ef ore any deletions) of the extensions to which
offset will be added.
Prompt:

Table

offset

the

= [O]

Response: The of&et value for this table.
5.

Repeat step 4 as necessary. The Offset Table Menu is redisplays after you enter the
offset value of a table.

Change the Timeout
Select:

for Receipt of first DTMF

(T) Timeout

Promot: Timeout
seconds)
1

for Receipt of First Digit

for
=

Response: The new timeout
7.

Digit value, if desired.

Receipt
[0]
-

First

DTMF disit

value from your worksheet.

Change the PBX Console Day Access Code, if desired.
Select:
(Y) PBX Console Attendant Day Access Code
Prompt:
PBX Console Attendant
Day Access
Response: The new access code value from your worksheet.

(Z) PBX Console Attendant

OH1

PBX Console

Attendant

Night Access Code

Night

Access

Response: The new access code value from your worksheet.
9.

Code =

Change the PBX Console Night Access Code, if desired.
Select:
Prompt:

(.1

Exit to the Receptionist

Dot. RN. A

Menu.

Code = [OHI

CP 6535

VoiceMemo

Dage 3 of7
Release 6.OA and later
Reference

Cl223Set Flow

Options

1. From the Receptionist
2.

rlenu Map 13

Menu, go to the Flow Options Menu.

Change the default values, if desired.
Seht:

(M) Mailbox

prompt:

Mailbox

Message Prompt Greeting/Name

Message

Prompt

(G/N)

Greeting/Name

(G/N)

[Gl
Response: Change the default prompt value, if desired.
4
Select:

(I’) PBX Console Operation

PBX
Prompt:
1P 1
Response: Y, if desired.

Console

Operation

(N/Y)

Y replaces the initial welcome greeting with a short dial tone to prompt
the operator that the Receptionist II is ready to receive the extension
number.
3. Exit to the Receptionist

Menu.

@D Set PBX Dial String

Definitions

1. Initialize the values for the dial string definitions

for the PBX on your site.

Select:
(I?) PBX Dial String Definitions
Prompt:
PBX :
Response: The letter that corresponds to the PBX at the installation

site

or
Press Z for default PBX options
prompt:

Initialize

to Default

Values

(y/n)

Response: Y to keep the default values,

N if you wish to change one or more values.

Dot. Rev. A

CP 6535
Page4of7
VoiceMemo

Release 6.OA and later
Rej2rence

If desired, change the values for any of the following
on your worksheet.
Select:

(A)
(B)
(C)
(E)
(F)
(G)
(H)

parameters to the new values

Post Directory number dial suing
Pre Directory number dial string / Attendant xfer string
Connect Dial string on Called Party Accept
Dial string for Return on Called Party Refused
Dial string for Return on Called Party Busy
Special actions on Reorder Tone Encountered
Dial suing for Return on Called Party RNA
4

Prompt:
[Default]
Response: New value from your worksheet.

Exit to the Receptionist

CID Set Extension
1. At the Receptionist
Select:
Prompt:

Menu.

Treatment

Menu, go to the Trunk/Extension

Treatment

Types Menu.

Menu Map 13

Current

Index

Response: The index number
Select:

Types

Number

[Nl
of an extension treatment

type on Worksheet

(N) Name of Current Index

Prompt: Name of

Current

Index

= [

Response: The name that corresponds to the index number

you entered in the

previous step.
2.

Limit mailbox access to either days or nights/weekends,
Select:

(I?) Authorized

prompt: Authorized
Response: A for any,
D for day only,

if desired.

Periods

(A/N/D)

N for night and weekend only.
3.

If desired, require users to have an authorization
current treatment type.
Select:
prompt:

(A) Authorized

Authorized

code to use mailboxes with the

Code

(0-9/*/#/A-D/M/P)

Response: The code shown on your worksheet.

Reach the Extension Type Setup Menu..

Dar RN. A

Menu Map 13

cl? 6535
Page 5 of 7
VoiceMemo

Release 6.OA and later
Reference

Step
5.

Change any values that do not correspond
Select:

(E) Extension

to those in Worksheet

Type Setup

prompt: EXTENSION SETUP:
Response: The values for any or all of the options that follow, as applicable.
Select:
prompt:

(S) Screen Calls?

Screen

Calls?

(Y/N

Response: Y to announce the caller’s name to the called party to accept or reject,
N to connect the call after greeting the called party.
*
Select:
(R) RNA Treatment?
(R/A/M)
prompt:
RNA Treatments?
(R/A/M)
= [RI
Response: R to go into the Redial Menu,
A to call the attendant,
M to drop into VoiceMemo
to take a message.
Select:
prompt:

(B) Busy Treatment?

Busy Treatment?

(R/A/M)

= [RI

Response: R to go into the Redial Menu,
A to call the attendant,
M to drop into VoiceMemo to take a message.
Sekct:
prompt:

(I) Reject Treatment?

Reject

(R/A/M)

Treatment?

(R/A/M)

= f.Rl

Response: R to go into the Redial Menu,
A to call the attendant,
M to drop into VoiceMemo to take a message.

Exit to the Trunk/Extension

If desired, specify where the caller is to be routed after a Busy or Ring-No-Answer
condition, when the caller does not enter any new instruction.
Select:

Treatment

Types Menu

to save the values.

(D) Redial Menu to Use

prompt: Redial
Response: M
A
D
R

Menu to

Use

(M/A/D/R)

IDI

to call extension’s mailbox in 3 seconds,
to call the PBX attendant in 6 seconds,
to disconnect from receptionist after 6 seconds,
means to redial the call.

Exit to the Receptionist

Repeat steps 1 to 8 of this section until you have configured
treatment types you need.

10. Exit to the Configuration

Menu to save your changes.
all the extension

Main Menu.

Dot. Rev. A

Page G of 7
VoiceMemo Release 6.OA and later

Step

Reference

11. Activate the configuration

if you have been working in the Offline inactive
or the Online inactive configuration.

configuration
or

Exit to the Main Menu.

Set Trunk

Treatment

1. Reach the Trunk/Extension
Select:

Prompt: Current

Types
Treatment

Number

[#I
of a trunk treatment type from Worksheet 4.

(N) Name of Current

Prompt: Name of

Menu Map 13

Index Number

Index

Response: The index number
select:

Types Menu.

Index

Current

Index

= [treatment

Response: The name that corresponds to the index number you entered in the
previous step.
2.

Limit mailbox access to either days or nights/weekends,
Select:

(P) Authorized

Prompt: Authorized

if desired.

Periods

(A/N/D)

Response: A for any,
D for day only,

N for night and weekend only.
3.

If desired, require users to have an authorization
current treatment type.
Select:

(A) Authorized

Prompt: Authorized

code to use mailboxes with the

Code

(O-g/*/#/A-D/M/P)

Response: The code shown on your worksheet.

Change connect criteria or failure treatment

Dot Rev. A

values, if desired.

[

VoiceMemo

cl? 6535
Page 7 of 7
Release 6.OA and later

step

Reference

Select:
Prompt:

(T) Trunk Type Setup
Current index number [l] is set to EXTENSION

Do you want

change

type.

to TRUNK type

? (Y/N)

Response: Y to change the index number to trunk type.
Select:
(C) Connect Criteria? (C/T/R)
= [C]
Connect
Criteria?
(C/T/R)
= [Cl
Prompt:
(C )
Response: C to tell VoiceMemo to assume that the connection is successful,
T to expect a dial or modem tone.,
R to expect a ring back tone.
Select:
(F) Failure Treatment? (R/A/M) = [R]
Failure
Treatment?
(R/A/M)
(F )
Prompt:
Response: R to go into the Redial Menu,
A to call the attendant,
M to drop into VoiceMemo to take a message.
Exit to the TrunWExtension

If desired, specify where the caller is to be routed after a Busy or Ring No Answer
condition, when the caller does not enter any new instruction.
Select:

(D) Redial Menu to Use

prompt:

Redial

Response: M
A
D
R

= [RI

Treatment

Menu to

Use

Types Menu to save the values.

(M/A/D/R)

[Dl

to call extension’s mailbox in 3 seconds,
to call the PBX attendant in 6 seconds,
to disconnect from Receptionist after 6 seconds,
to redial the call.

Save values and return to the Receptionist

Menu.

8. Repeat steps 1 to 7 of this section until you have configured
types you need.
9.

Exit to the Configuration

all the trunk treatment

Main Menu.

10. Activate the configuration
configuration

if you have been working in the Offline inactive
or the Online inactive configuration.

or
Exitto

theMainMenu.

11. Configure

Receptionist

II extensions, if desired.

CP 6537

Doc.Rcv.A

cp
Add Receptionist

II Extension Numbers

VoiceMemo

6536

Pagelof2
Release G.OA and later

This optional procedure adds Receptionist II extension numbers. Use this procedure if
you have a heavily used system and require a hunt group for Receptionist II.
Refrence

steb

@D Add an Extension
1. Reach the System Maintenance
Extensions Menu.
2. Add a Receptionist

Main Menu, then go the Automated

vienu Map 12

II extension number.

(B) Automated Receptionist Extensions
Prompt:
COMMAND (A/D/P/R/X)
:
Select:
(A) Add an extension
prompt:
Receptionist
’ s extension
to
Response: Receptionist II extension number.
Select:

Press Enter to save the number.

Print the extension list.
Select:

Receptionist

add:

(P) Print the extension list.

@:B Delete an Extension
1. Reach the Automated
Select:

prompt:

Receptionist

(D) Delete an extension
Receptionist’s
extension

Response: Extension

Press Enter to save the number.

Print the extension list.
Select:

@22 Change

the Receptionist
Receptionist

Display the Receptionist
Select:

delete:

(P) Print the extension list.

1. Reach the Automated
2.

Menu Map 12

number.

Extensions Menu.

Dial String
Extensions Menu.

Menu Map 12

II dial string.

(P) Print the extension list.

DocRm.A

Cl’ 6536
Page 2 of 2
6.0 VoiceMemo

Release 6.OA and later
Reference

Step

Change the Receptionist
Select:

prompt:

dial string, if desired.

(R) Change Receptionist
New Receptionist

Dial String

Dial

String?

Response: New dial string.

A Receptionist

Dial String can vary from l-16 digits (O-9, A-D, +, *, #>

The dial string is sent by an integrated VoiceMemo port when a
Receptionist port is forwarded to it. This is usually used to tell the
Receptionist port to hang up by putting a ‘#’ into the dial string.
r.

4. Etit to save your changes.

Doc.Rcv.A

CP
VoiceMemo

6537

Pagelofl
Release G.OA and later

This procedure configures a single-digit access menu. Use this procedure to give callers
quick access to frequently-called departments or persons.
step
1. Using the following

-r

tree structure, create the required mailboxes.

Reference

Y 3311

Administrator’s

Option 1
Mailbox
(Chain)

Option 2
Mailbox
I

Option 3
Mailbox
1

-I

Assign FCOS 15 to the administrator’s mailbox. Configure the other mailboxes as
subordinate mailboxes in a tree configuration;
if one of the options allows the user
to dial an extension or dial by name, assign FCOS 8 to the mailbox.
Sample subordinate mailboxes: Option
Option 2 - Technical Support; Option

(:I? 331 1

1 - Dial an extension or dial by name;
3 -Job Hotline

Dcckv.A

CP
Set Up Receptionist

II Test Configuration

VoiceMemo

6539

Page 1 of 3
Release 6.OA and later

The procedure summarizes the procedures for testing Receptionist II configuration. The
test setup uses three 2500 sets, designated as Station A, Station B, and Station C. The
test Console Attendant is the actual Attendant (if any) who provides assistance to callers
who ccwait,” in response to the prompt, “Please enter an extension number, or wait for
assistance.”
Reference

@D
1.

Set Up Telephone

Sets

Set up three telephone sets, Station A, Station B, and Station C, as shown in
Figure 1.

2. Record the extension numbers of Stations B and C. You will be associating
mailboxes with these telephones.
3.

If desired, set up a Console Attendant

Connect a PBX line to the Receptionist

5. Record the Reception

II extension

phone.
II port.

number.
Centigram

n..a+t

P”L(

Private

“Q,

JI:

Receptionist

Branch

Test Station
“Attendant”-

Figure

6 Server

,r,h

U
Console

IIPY

Series

“c”

Test Station “B
“Called Party”

Attendant

1 Receptionist

409%&U

II Test Configuration

Doc.Rsv.A

CP 6539

Page2of3
VoiceMemo

Release G.OA and later
Reference

step

@D Add

Phoneline

1. Reach the Phoneline
2.

Exceptions
tienu Map 10

Exceptions Menu.

Addphonelineexceptions.
(A) Add exceptions
Keep
entering
triplets,
then
enter
on a
line
by itself.
line
triplets
to change:
Response: Line triplet of an Series 6 server phone port connected to the PB&, or a
range of line triplets if your SL- 1 ports are contiguous.
select:

Prompt:

prompt:

Command=

Response: 9 (Ringing Timeout)
Prompt:
Value=
Response: 11 (3 rings)

prompt:

Command=
Response: 11 (Speak Timeout)
Prompt:
Value=
Response: 1 (for quicker response from Receptionist

@ID Create
3.

Mailboxes

II)

for ‘Pests

Create a mailbox with the following characteristics:
l

Mailbox

number

Day or Night Treatment
test

Mailbox’s

Attendant’s

Unlimited

Tutorial

Doe. RN. A

= Station B’s extension number
me = the treatment

(l-16)

that you wish to

extension number = Station B’s extension number
extension number = Station C’s extension number
Feature COS
=N

VoiceMemo

cl? 6539
Page3of3
Release 6.OA and later

SteD
4.

Reference

Create a mailbox with the following

characteristics:

Mailbox

number = Station C’s extension number

Mailbox’s

extension number = Station C’s extension number

Unlimited

Feature COS

Tutorial

5. Record a name in Mailboxes B and C.
a.

Call in to the Message Center, and log into Mailbox

Press @ for User Options.

Press Q“s” , then record the Mailbox

Press @ to exit User Options.

Press @ twice in succession to return to the Message Center greeting.

name, “Called Party.”

@ED Test the Configuration
6. Test Receptionist II setup: greetings and assistance call processing, dialing plan and
mapping of mailboxes to extension, call screening, reorder tone.

6539

7. Test mailbox treatment

6940

6541

8. Test intermediate

types.

attendant

call processing.

Dar Rev. A

cr
Test the Receptionist

II Setup

VoiceMemo

The procedures in this section test Receptionist
l
l
l
l

Page 1 of 3
Release G.OA and later

II setup for processing calls:

Greetings and Assistance Call Processing
Dialing plan and mapping of mailboxes to extensions
Call screening
Reorder tone
R4;rence

SteD

6540

Test Greetings

and Assistance

Call Processing

1. Call into the Receptionist II main number liom Station A. Check that the proper
greeting, Day or Night, is played for the time period.
r.
2. Allow the call to time out (wait).
If a PBX Console Attendant’s
listen on the butt set for:

Access Code is configured

for the time period,

- Pre-DN string dialing, including the switch hook flash
- PBX Console Attendant Day Access Code dialing
- Post-DN string dialing
- Answer
If no PBX Console Attendant’s Access Code is configured,
does have an Attendant’s Mailbox:

but the line group

- The wait prompt, if enabled, should say “Please enter an extension number
or wait.” (Receptionist II should automatically eliminate the prompt for
assistance).
- Upon timeout, you should be prompted to “Please leave your name, the
name of the person you are calling, and a message.”
If neither a Console Attendant nor an Attendant’s
sure that the Wait Prompt is disabled

Mailbox

is configured,

3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the other time period, to be sure that greetings and
assistance call processing are correct for both day and night/weekend hours.

Test Dialing

Plan

Refer to Receptionist

II Worksheet

1. For each leading digit that does not have a zero in the dialing plan, call at least one
extension with the correct number of digits, and one extension that is incorrect, to
be sure that Receptionist II accepts the valid extension number, and rejects the
invalid one.
2. When the dialing plan specifies “V,” for variable length, test several lengths to be
sure that they are accepted.

DorRN.A

CP 6540
Page2of3
VoiceMemo

Release 6.OA and later
R4;erence

step

Enter one extension number for each group of extensions that show a zero in the
dialing plan. Receptionist II should reject all such extensions.

Repeat steps 1 through 3 for the other time period, to be sure that greetings and
assistance call processing are correct for both day and night/weekend hours.

4GD Test Mapping
If delete digits or offsets are set for any group of extensions, enter the number of the
“called party” test extension into the extension field of a mailbox that will be
reached by this mapping. If the number is mapped correctly, the test extension will
ring. Follow this procedure for each group of mailboxes with leading digits that
specify mapping.
5.

Repeat steps 1 through 3 for the other time period, to be sure that greetings and
assistance call processing are correct for both day and night/weekend hours.

@ED lest

Call Screening:

Call Accepted

1. Dial Receptionist II from Station A. Be sure that Receptionist
appropriate greeting.

II answers with the

2. Enter the mailbox number of Station B.
3. When Receptionist
say your name.
Receptionist
4.

II says, “I will ring [called party].

may I say is calling?”

II says, “Please hold.”

Leave Station A off hook, and listen on the butt set for:
l

Pre-DN

string dialing

Extension number dialing

Post-DN

Ringing - Count

string dialing
the number of rings!

5. Answer the call at Station B. Listen for “Hello,
Press A to accept the call, R to refuse it.”
6.

Whom

you have a call from [your name].

Press A. Listen on the buttset while Receptionist II dials the Connect dial string on
called party accept (Menu 8), then releases the call. Adjust this string if Station A
fails to connect with Station B.

Doe. Pa. A

cl? 6540
Page 3 of 3
Release 6.OA and later

VoiceMemo

step

Reference

GE3 Call Screening:

Call Rejected

1. Dial Receptionist II from Station A. Be sure that Receptionist
appropriate greeting.
2.

Enter the mailbox number of Station B.

3. When Receptionist
say your name.
Receptionist
4.

II answers with the

II says, “I will ring Called Party. Whom

II says, “Please hold.”

may I say is calling?”
c.

Leave Station A off hook, and listen on the butt set for:
l

Pre-DN

string dialing

Extension number dialing

Post-DN

Ringing - Count the number of rings!

string dialing

5. Answer the call at Station B. Listen for “Hello, you have a call from [your name].
Press A to accept the call, R to refuse it.”
6. Press R, then hang up the phone at Station B. Listen on the butt set while
Receptionist II dials the Dial string for return on called party refused. Adjust this
string if Receptionist II fails to return to Station A.
7.

Listen at Station A as Receptionist

II says “I’m sorry [your name] did not answer.”

The system then acts according to the Reject treatment type for Station B (play a
redial menu, force to assistance, or force to the mailbox to leave a message).

8. If the treatment type does not perform as expected (for example, the caller was
forced to assistance when a redial menu was desired), go back into the
reconfiguration
program, and change the Reject treatment type programming.

@D Test Reorder
1. Call into Receptionist

Tone
II from Station A.

Dial an invalid extension number that conforms to the PBX dialing plan (or an
extension that is set to “do not disturb,” if the PBX gives reorder tone on do not
disturb).

Listen on the butt set to the reorder tone.

Receptionist II should return to Station A, and play the prompt that is appropriate
for the “Special actions on reorder tone encountered” dial string.

D0C.kV.A

cp
Test Mailbox

Treatment

Types

VoiceMemo

This test plan verifies that the extension and trunk treatment
configured process calls correctly in the following situations

6541

Page 1 of 2
Release G.OA and later

types that you have

Busy
Ring No Answer (RNA)
0 Call screening
l

The test plan also tests whether the trunk treatment
process calls correctly in the following situations:
l
l

types that you have configured

Successful connection
Failure treatment on Busy
4

step

Reference

Busy

1. Take Station B (the “Called Party”) off-hook.
2. Dial Receptionist II from Station A (the “Calling Party”).
Receptionist-II
answers with the appropriate greeting.
3. Enter the mailbox

of Station B.

number

Receptionist II says, “I will ring Called Party. Whom
treatment type has call screening) Please hold.”
4.

Be sure that

may I say is calling? (if the

Listen on the butt set for:
l

Pre-DN

string dialing

Extension number dialing

Post-DN

A busy tone

Return string

Receptionist

string dialing

II’s response to the failure condition

Ring No Answer

(RNA)

1. Dial Receptionist II from Station A. Be sure that Receptionist
appropriate greeting.
2. Enter the mailbox

number

II answers with the

of Station B.

Receptionist II says, “I will ring Called Party. Whom
treatment type has call screening) Please hold.”

may I say is calling? (if the

Dot. P.m. A

CP 6541
Page 2 of 2
VoiceMemo Release 6.OA and later
Reference

Step
3.

Listen on the butt set for:
l

Pre-DN

string dialing

Extension number

Post-DN

Ringing - Count

Return string

Receptionist

dialing

string dialing
the number

of rings!

II’s response to the failure condition.

If the treatment type does not perform as expected (for example, the caller was
forced to assistance when a redial menu was desired), go back into the
reconfiguration
program and change the treatment type programming.

@CD Test Failure

lest

This test can only be done for trunk treatment
or R (Ringing).
1. Busy out Trunk

B (the “Called

types with connect criteria T (Tone)

Party”).

Note the proper connect criteria for the treatment

C = Cut through

type:

(All calls that are dialed are considered

IS successful if Receptionist
T=Tone(Acall’
tone after dialing the number)

II encounters

successful.)
a dial tone or computer

R = Ringing (Receptionist II considers the call successful only if it receives ringing
in response to dialing the number)
Be sure the trunk number that you are dialing can answer with the response that
matches the connect criteria.
I

Dial Receptionist II Trunk
appropriate greeting.

Enter the number

Receptionist

Listen on the butt set for:

A. Check that Receptionist

of Mailbox

II says, “I will ring Called Party.

Pre-DN

Mailbox’s

Post-DN

II answers with the

Please hold.”

string dialing
extension number

dialing

string dialing

If the failure treatment does not perform as expected, go back into the
reconfiguration
program and adjust the treatment type programming.

Dot. RN. A

cp
Test Intermediate

Attendant

Call Processing

This test determines if Receptionist
number.

VoiceMemo

II processes calls to the Attendant’s

6542

Pagelofl
Release 6.OA and later

extension

Reference

Step
1. Take Station B (the “Called Party”) off-hook.
2.

Dial Receptionist II from Station A (the “Calling
II answers with the appropriate greeting.

3. Enter the mailbox
4.

number

Party”).

of Station B.

Receptionist II says, “I will ring Called Party. Whom
is call screening) Please hold.”

5. When Receptionist

Be sure that Receptionist

may I say is calling? (if there
r.

II returns to Station A, choose the assistance option.

6. Listen on the butt set for:
l

Pre-DN

string dialing, including

Attendant’s

Post-DN

Ringing

extension number dialing
string dialing (Menu 8)

7. Answer station C. Receptionist
Called Party.”
l

the switch hook flash

II should announce,

“Hello.

If Mailbox B’s treatment type specifies call screening,
issue the call screening prompts. Accept the call.

You have a call for
Receptionist

II will

@lD Troubleshooting

1. Check switch hook flash timing. If the VoiceMemo program does not put Station
A on hold before dialing, the switch hook flash timing may be too short; if Station
A is disconnected almost immediately, the switch hook flash timing is too long. See
the Phoneline Exceptions section of your Centigum Series Ghstdkztion and Service
Manzlalfor instructions on adjusting Telephony Parameter #23, flash time.
program and adjust

CP 6535

3. If the treatment type does not perform as expected, go back into the reconfiguration
program and change the treatment type.

CP 6535

2. If a dial string in step 6 fails, go back into the reconfiguration
the dial string programming.

Dot. RN. A

Worksheets
This section contains worksheet for Receptionist II configuration.
You may wish to
make copies of these worksheets and keep the originals for future reference.

Receptionist II Worksheet 1
Define line groups

Current group

Add lines to
current group

Name of
current group
Line group only
applications

Dialing

plan optlons

Drop lines from
current group

Group selected
I

Assign
VoiceMemo

0 yes

On0

Dialing plan

Delete digits
table

Cffset table

Name
/
Greeting
1

Flow options

Console
operation mode?

PBX Dial String
options

Default optons

oy=

On0
Hitachi DX

SL-1

0
0

AT&T Dimension

Centrex

ROLM

Telex

0
0

NEC

0
0
0

Siemens Saturn

AT&T System

Fujitsu

Mite1 Focus

75185

Post-DN string
Pre-DN string

Connect dial
string on called
party accept

Special actions on
reorder tone
encountered

511oMkl.nl5

Receptionist II Worksheet 2

Day/Night

Start time of
workday

Weekend days
M

End time of
workday
Dialing Plan Menu

Dialing plan
1

Optional star*
$rx dtalmg

Dial string and mailbox
menu

Dial-by-Name

System
attendant’s
extension
Aministrator’s
mailbox #

Attendant’s transfer
string or PBX
predirectory #

E-mail transfer
string

General greeting
mailbox #

Pm-company
name dial string

Pre-maibox greeting
dial string

Last name first
flag?

Attendant’s mailbox # ‘71

ye=

On0
Exact match
break?

0 Yes

On0
Allow Dial an
Extension menu

Allow dial and
extension for
callers?

yes

0 no

Single digit
access?
Supress
mailbox
number?

Allow dial and
extension for
users?

yes

Number of names
threshold

On0
0 Yes
On0
0 Yes
On0

Receptionist II Worksheet 3
Index number

Authorized
period

0
all

0
day only

0
night only

Authorization
code

Screen calls?

RNA treatment

yes

Redial menu

Assistance only

Mailbox only

0
Rediaj menu

0
Assistance

Only

0
Mailbox only

0
Redial menu

0
Assistance Only

0
Mailbox only

Busy treatment

Reject
treatment

Index number

Authorized
period

Authorization
code

Screen calls?
0
RNA treatment

yes

0””

Busy treatment

Reject
treatment

0
Redial menu

0
Assistance only

0
Mailbox only

0
Redial menu

0
Assistance

0
Mailbox only

Ot’Ily

Receptionist II Worksheet 4
Index number

Authorized
period

Failure
treatment

0
all

0
Cut through

0
day only

0
night only

0
Tone

0
Ring
l,

Redial menu to
use

Reject
treatment

0
Redial menu

0
Assistance Only

0
Mailbox only

0
Redial

0
Assistance

0
Disconnect

Index number

I
Authorized
period

0
all

0
day only

0
night only

0
Cut through

0
Tone

0
Ring

0
Rediat menu

0
Assistance only

0
Mailbox only

0
Redial

0
Assistance

0
Disconnect

f$orization

Failure
treatment

Redial menu to
use

Reject
treatment

Index name

Index
#
# dial around, l-3

C
call screening, l-2
conversion
extension to associatedmailbox number, l-7
extension-to-mailbox Number, l-8

authorization code, 2- 14
authorized period, 2- 14
Busy, 2-15
index name, 2-13
index number, 2- 13
redial menu, 2-15
Reject, 2- 1.5
RNA, 2-15
screencalls, 2-14
Extension Treatment Types
defaults table, 2- 17

D
day/night, l-2
day/night accesscode, 2-6
PBX, 2-6
sequence,2-7
Delete Digits Table, 2-3
Dial String
ATT, 2-12
busy, 2-10
Centrex, 2- 12
connect, 2-10
Fujitsu, 2- 12
Hitachi, 2-12
Mitel, 2-12
NEC, 2-12
NT SL-1,2-12
PBX, default values, 2-12
PBX, definitions, 2-8
PBX, post-directory number, 2-9
PBX, pre-directory number, 2-9
preprogrammed, 2- 12
reconnect caller, 2- 10
RNA, 2-10
ROLM, 2-12
Siemens,2-12
Telex, 2-12

E
ExtensionTreatment Type, 2-l 3

F
Flow Options, 2-7
mailbox messageprompt, 2-7
PBX console operation, 2-8
I
installation
optional feature, CP 5402

L
log into mailbox
mailbox number followed by #, l-4
logging into mailbox, l-3

M
menu
Redial Menu to Use, 2- 16
single-digit access,1-3, l-9
to direct outside callers to extension or mailbox, l-3

0
Offset Table, 2-4
optional features, installing, CP 5402

P
PBX dial plan

Index- 1

Index

defined, 2-2
PBX dialing plan, 2-2
Prompts, l-2

R
Receptionist II
add extension numbers, CP 6536
call flow, l-4
call processing, 2-l
call processinginstructions, 2- 13, 1-4, 1-9
call processingparameters,2-2
configuration, CP 6535
defined, l-l
extensions,2- 19
features, l-2
interaction with mailbox, 2-18
line group, 2-1
messagefunctions (VoiceMemo), contiguration,CP 3301
operation, 1-4, l-9
set up test configuration, CP 6539
tasks, l-l
test setup, CP 6540
worksheets, 2-19,2-20
Reorder tone, l-8

Index-2

rerouting calls, 1-2

S
Single-Digit Access
speciaImailboxes for, 2-19

l=
test intermediate attendant call processing, CP 6542
test mailbox treatment types, CP 6541
timing parameter, 2-6
transfer
blind, 1-I
screened, 1-1, l-5
c.
supervised, I- 1
typical, l-4
Trunk Treatment Types7
connect criteria, 2-17
failure treatment. 2- 18

V
VoiceMemo configuration, CP 3301

Issue 1 Release 2.0 January 1996

1 Voice

Processing

Release
Notes

Solutions

This publication is protected by federal copyright law. No part of this
publication may be copied or distributed, stored in a retrieval system, or
translated into any human or computer language in any form or by any means
electronic, mechanical, magnetic, manual or otherwise, or disclosed to third
parties without the express written permission of Centigram Communications
Corporation, 91 East Tasman Drive, San Jose, CA 95134.

REPRODUCTION
Licensed users and authorized distributors of Centigram products may copy
this document for use with Centigram products provided that the copyright
notice above is included in all reproductions.

PROPRIETARY TERMS
The following are trademarks of Centigram Communications Corporation:
AIP, CallText, Centigram, PROSE, Speaklt, SpeechPlus, SPEECH+,
TruVoice, VGS, VoiceMemo
PROSE 2000 Version 1 01992 Centigram Communications Corporation. _
All other brand and product names are claimed or registered marks of their
respective companies.

NOTICE
The information contained in this document is believed to be accurate in all
respects but is not warranted by Mite1Corporation (MITEL@).The information
is subject to change without notice and should not be construed in any way
as a commitment by Mite1 or any of its affiliates or subsidiaries. Mite1 and its
affiliates and subsidiaries assume no responsibility for any errors or omissions
in this document. Revisions of this document or new editions of it may be
issued to incorporate such changes.

Software Release 6.OB Release Notes

Table of Contents
Preface
Improvements and Corrected Problems
OperatingSystem........................................................................................................................ 2
AG8F/AG30Drivers................................................................................................................... 4
CentrexIntegration..................................................................................................................... 4
CTI SmartcardIssues.................................................................................................................. 4
GroundStart TCP....................................................................................................................... 5
t
Hyatt/Encore/LogisticsPMS....................................................................................................... 5
MVIP Clock Configuration......................................................................................................... 5
NEC Integrations........................................................................................................................ 5
OneView..................................................................................................................................... 5
License Numbers .....................................................................................................
MESA-Net Prefix String.. ........................................................................................
OneView 1.1 System Address Book .........................................................................
Uninstall.. ................................................................................................................
Upload/Download Capabilities.. ...............................................................................

PhonelineException9 RingingTimeout.....................................................................................
PhonelineException12 MF DetectEnable.................................................................................
SMSMWI ..................................................................................................................................
ss7 .............................................................................................................................................
SS7 Dial Plans. ........................................................................................................
ISUP ACM Message .................................................................................................
ISUP IAM Messages .................................................................................................

Tl/El .......................................................................................................................................
- UI/ESMDI Integration
..............................................................................................................
UIMAP utility ..........................................................................................................................
UI MailboxMappings...............................................................................................................
Unified TCP/IPInstallation.......................................................................................................

.5
.5
.6
.6
.6

6
6
6
7
.7
8
9

11
12
12
12
13

Known Problem
Originate/AnswerLink ConventionsIn Mesa-Net...... ....... .... .. .... .. ...... ......... .. ........ .... ........ .. ..... . 16

.. .

111

Software Release 6.OB Release Notes

Preface
This release note identifies features in Centigram Software Release 6.0 that are not currently documented in the technical
manuals for this release. It includes:
.
Descriptions of improvements and corrected problems
.
A list of known problems in this release

Software Release 6.OB Release Notes

Improvements
This

and Corrected

Problems

section
describes
theimprovements and corrected problems in Release 6.OB.

Operating System
IDE Systems

Correctedinformationto identify IDE systemscorrectly,not mistakenlyidentifying them asMCBl
systems
Mailbox Maintenance
Mailbox Maintenance(optionC) modifiedso that previousmailboxfunction works consistentlywith
nextmailboxfunction. Allows previousfunctionto wrap aroundendof file or displaylast mailbox
record by specifyingmailbox99999999999
andthe usepreviousfunctiori key.
Logfile Menu
Option C in the Logfile Menu (ChooseLogfile SerialRedirection)hasbeenchangedto allow error log
outputfor eachmoduleto be redirectedto the specifiedredirectionserialport on its own module.
LOGFILE
(C)
(T)
(S)
(D)
(X)
If

Choose Logfile
Toggle Display
Show logfile
Delete
logfile
Exit
you need

help

Serial
between

later,

COMMAND (C/T/S/D/X):
Enter
Redirect

filename
logfile

Redirection
console

type

and

logfile

c
save

log

output

data
:

= [/usr/vm/log/logfilel

Software Release 6.OB Release Notes

(only

serial

ports

which

are physically

present

will

be displayed)

/dev/serl,
serial
port
/dev/ser2,
serial
port
2:
/dev/ser3,
serial
port
3:
4:
/dev/ser4,
serial
port
/dev/ser5,
serial
port
5:
6:
/dev/ser6,
serial
port
7:
/dev/conl,
console
8:
Clear redirection
Current
serial
port redirection
is:
Enter number from 1 to 8:

1
2
3
4
5
6

(display

that

follows

a system

having

only

one active

Redirect
Serial
Port
Save logfile
changes

module)

for all modules
(y/n)
? [N]

set

I/dev/ser21

e
(return

display

menu options)

-----------------------------------------------------(for

systems

having

more than

one active

module)

The default
is to redirect
and combine the logfile
output
of all
modules
Alternatively,
you can elect to
to a single module's
serial
port.
redirect
each module's
logfile
output to its own serial
port.
Combine
(display

that

follows

all
for

logfile

the

"yes"

output

display

a single

serial

port

(Y/N)

? [Y]

response)

Redirect
Serial
Port
Save logfile
changes
(return

for all modules
(y/n)
? [N]

set

[/dev/ser21

menu options)

----------------------------------------------

Combine
-

(display

that

follows

for

the

Module
Module
Module
Module

all
"no"

1
2
3
4

(only

active

Save

logfile

(return

logfile

output

to a single

Serial
Serial
Serial
Serial

Port
Port
Port
Port

serial

port

(Y/N)

? [Yl n

response)

Redirect
Redirect
Redirect
Redirect
modules

will

changes
display

is
is
is
is

set

set
set
set

to
to
to

[//l/dev/ser21
[//2/dev/ser21
[//3/dev/ser21
[//4/dev/ser21

be displayed)

(y/n)

? [N]

menu options)

Software Release 6.OB Release Notes

AG8F/AG30 Drivers
In RSD 3.1 F, when both AG8F and AG30 drivers were loaded, AG30 failed to load.

Centrex Integration
A new menu to configure message waiting delay has been added to the Offline Menu. From the Offline menu, enter (L)
Linegroup and RS232 Applications, enter (C) Centrex, (N) Message notification menu, then (M) Message Waiting
Request Interval.
Valid interval range for message waiting delay is 0 - 1000 ms (0 - 1 set).
Note:
Fujitsu 9600 integrations should be set to 1 second (1000 ms).

CTI Smartcard Issues
Users that employ the CTI Smartcard in their configuration should make sure this device is not overloaded. The
following table shows e bits per second supportedon each port for configurations with 1 to 8 ports

#of
Ports

Bps supported
per port

38400

19200

9600

4800

2400

Comments
l

Card supports total throughput of 38400 bps for
one port or two ports

Data throughput becomes less efficient with the
addition of more ports

1 CTI Smartcard per host limitation

If greater throughput is required, replace the CTI Smartcard with the Serial 16/32 card.
Series 6 servers running revision 6.OA software may be using a port address of 300 and an interrupt of 5. Series 6
systems running with revision 6.OB software must use a port address of 320 and an interrupt of 15, to permit an even
broader array of connectivity option.
Series 6 servers with revision 6.OA software will need to remove the CTI Smartcard and modify the port address to 320
and the card interrupt to 15 either prior to or as part of an update to 6.OB software (change on 6.OA and then update or
modify during the update process). Centigram recommends that this work be completed prior to the update to simplify
the steps involved in the update process.
To do this as part of the update process, do a shutdown then mm off the power on the server, remove the CTI Smartcard,
move the interrupt shunt from the 5 position to the 15 position. Then, set the 8 toggle DIP switch as follows:
loff
2off
3 on
40n
5off
6 on
7 on
8 on
After making these changes, put the card back in the machine. Install the 6.OB software and include in your
configuration process the Smartcard configuration in the Offline Menu. Select interrupt 15 for the CTI Smartcard.
Note:
Through the Configure Smartcard Table option of the Offline Menu, confirm
that the current Smartcard table reflects the correct configuration (for example,

Software Release 6.OB Release Notes

no cards taken out or moved), then duplicate the current configuration before
proceeding with the 6,OB software installation.
Series 6.0 customers who plan to use AT&T Integration and their VBPC card must buy the Serial 16/32 card for their
connectivity needs and not use a Smartcard.

Ground Start TCP
Digital Ground Start TCP has been added to Release of 6.OB.

Hyatt/Encore/Logistics

PMS

The Hyatt PMS optional feature diskette now gives the option to configure PMS integration. The System configuration
menu for Release 6.0 has been modified to display the following:
(A) Restore
COS
(B) Backup COS
(C) Configure
MWI suppression
4
(E) Configure
PMS integration
(F) Feature
COS
(G) Group COS
(L) Limits
COS
(M) Restriction
COS
(N) Network
COS
(T) Tenant
COS
(P) Phoneline
Exceptions
(R) Reconfigure
system
(X) Exit

Limitations
When both EECO and Hyatt are installed on the same server:
l
The menu item (E) Configuration PMS integration will appear twice.
l
Changes to the Configure PMS integration will affect both the Hyatt and EECO PMSs.

MVIP Clock Configuration
The linecard loader, which was not working in RSD 3.1F for release 6.0, has been fixed.

NEC Integrations
s

Some calls were not reaching the Series 6 server, which was not receiving some data packets from integrations. Calls are
now reaching the server.

OneView
This section describes OneView features.

License Numbers
The license numbers for the OneView applications are now getting created properly.

MESA-Net Prefix String
The users could not clear the MESA-Net prefix string. Placing a zero as the first character in the string clears the prefix
string.

Software Release 6.OB Release Notes

OneView 1.1 System Address Book
The OneView 1.1 System Address Book can now be stored on the server.

Uninstall
The capability to Uninstall the seats / sessions has been added. Before this release you could not uninstall seats or
sessions. A new menu item M has been added to provide this capability.

Upload/Download

Capabilities

Improved the upload/download

capabilities of the OneView remote system by using TCP.

Phoneline Exception 9 Ringing Timeout
Changing this parameter now works for all values between 0 and 255 seconds (time that must elapse, after ringing has
started, before the Series 6 server considers the call to be “Ring No Answer.”

Phoneline Exception 12 MF Detect Enable
Phoneline Exception 12 can be set to enable in Release 6.OB. This enables the detection of MF tones (North American
Standard).

SMS MWI
The SMS MWI feature of Release 6.OB has a new connection option. This product can now work over a TCPLP link. The
old mode of serial connection is also supported. Following are the new menus showing these Options.
SMS-MWI INTEGRATION
Current
Link Index = [l]
(1)
Module Number = [l]
(N)
Active
(Y/N) = [Y]
(A)
Define
Login Parameters
(L)
Define
Message Parameters
(Ml
Protocol
CONFIGURATION
(PI
Type of Connection(S=Serial,
T = TCP/IP)=
[Tl
(Tl
Connection
Parameters
CONFIGURATION
(Cl
Pager Number = [l]
(PI
Show CONNECTION Parameters
(S)
Exit
(Xl
Enter

'L'

for

Parameters.

SMS-MWI rlouin Menu
Login Name....
CL)
Password......
(PI
System Message
(S)
Exit
(Xl
Enter

'M'

for

Message

= [centigram]
= [cgram93]
= [Optus SMSC]

Parameter

S[
(Cl
(G)
(Ml
(RI

Cluster
ID = [l]
GSM code..
= [Ol]
Message Timer
(TlOO)
Response Timer
(TlOl)

= [l]
= [3]

Software Release 6.OB Release Notes

CL)
(A)
(Xl
Enter

'P'

Link Integrity
Restransmission
Exit
for

Protocol

Timer
(T102) = [31
Attempts
(Nl) = [33

Configuration

SMS-MWI Protocol
Confiua
Send mwi-off
long format
= [Nl
(S)
Checksum checking
enabled
= [Nl
(Cl
Do not perform
Login sequence
= [Nl
CL)
Dump log messages
in logfile
= [Nl
CD)
Cut-through-Paging
enabled
= [Nl
(PI
Exit
(Xl

For serial type of connection, by entering ‘C’, the connection parameters will be
SMS-MWI Serial
Parametezx
Port Name = [Sctil]
(PI
Baud Rate = [S]
(B)
Exit
(Xl
For TCP/IP

co~ection,

by entering ‘C’, the co~ection
parameters will be
MWI TCP/IP Paramea
Input
Port = [1025]
CL)
Output
Port = [1026]
(PI
Hostname
= [host
name]
(HI
Exit
(Xl

ss7
This release of SS7 incorporates feed back from customer sites on outstanding SS7 issues. These issues which have been
addressed in ST12 are
l
SS7 Dial Plan issues.
l
ANSI Compliance testing.
l
Configuration menus.
0 SS7 Outdial Functionality.
0 Strip Outgoing Zeros.
The new menus are:
0
l

SS7Dial Plans.
The following sites sho

ISUP ACM Messages.
ISUP IAM Messages.

Software Release 6.OB Release Notes

Shinsegi

syspilnum

Enter Pilot number. Ensure DID mailbox length
c Pilot number length.

BellSoutlKhile

Syspilnum

Enter Pilot number.

ISUPACM Message.
This message is sent from the VM back to the switch in response to an incoming call. The following parameters should be
configured for the Backward Call Indicators.

SS7 ACM ISUP Messages
Configuration
--------___------_______________________--(A)
(B)

ACM Backward
ACM Backward

Ind Charge

indicator

Ind

Called

Party's

Status

Ind

Called

Party's

Category

Ind

End-to-End

Call

Ind

Internetworking

Call

Ind

End-to-End

Call
Call
Call
Call

Ind
Ind
Ind
Ind

ISDN
ISDN
Echo
SCCP

Call
Call

? = [2]
Indicator?

= [II
(C)
(D)

ACM Backward Call
Indicator
? = [l]
ACM Backward Call

Method

Indication?

= to1
(E)

ACM Backward

Indicator's?

= LOI
(F)

ACM Backward

Information

Indicator

= LOI
(G)
(H)
(I)
(J)
(X)

ACM
ACM
ACM
ACM
Exit

Backward
Backward
Backward
Backward

User Part Indicator
? = [l]
Access Indicator
? = [O]
control
device Indicator
? = [O]
method Indicator
? = [O]

Software Release 6.OB Release Notes

SoftwareRelease6.OB

SS7 ISUP IAM Messages
(A)
(B)

LOI
(Cl
(D)
(El
(F)
(G)
(HI
(1)

(J)
(K)
(L)
(Ml
(N)
(0)
(PI
(Q)
(R)
(Xl

IAM Nature
IAM Nature
IAM
IAM
IAM
IAM
IAM
IAM
IAM
IAM
IAM
IAM
IAM
IAM
IAM
IAM
IAM
IAM
Exit

Configuration

of Connection
of Connection

Ind
Ind

ReleaseNotes

Menu
Satellite
Continuity

Indicator
? = [O 1
? =
Check Indicator

Echo Control
Indicator
? = [O]
Nature of Connection
Ind
Forward Call Ind Nat/Inter
Call Ind ? = [O]
Forward call
Ind End-to-End
Method Ind ? = 101
Forward Call Ind Internetworking
Ind ? = [O]
Forward Call Ind
End-to-End
Information
Ind ? = [O]
Forward Call Ind
ISDN User Part Ind ? = [ll
Forward Call Ind
ISDN User Part Pref Ind ? = [O]
Forward Call Ind
ISDN Access Ind ? = [l]
Forward Call Ind
SCCP Method Ind ? = [O]
TX Med Requirements
? = [3]
CLD Party Num Nature of Address Ind ? = [ll
CLD Party Num Number Plan Ind ? = 11).
CLG Party Num Number Plan Ind ? = [l]
CLG Party Num Address Presentation
Ind ? = 111
CLG Party Num Screen Ind ? = 131
CLG Party Num Nature of Address Ind ? = 131

Tl/El
Release 6.OA supported only Common Channel Signaling (CCS) integrations over El and Channel Associated Signaling
(CAS) integrations over Tl previous to this revision. Release 6.OB provides the flexibility to specify what type of
signaling is being provided on each of the Tl/Bl trunks in the system. This permits SS7 support over Tl now and will
support future channel associated signaling (for example, Mercury Subscriber Line) over Centigram El trunks.
A new menu choice S-configure Signaling type-has been added to the Tl/El trunk configuration menu. This menu
includes the following three choices:
A CAS Signaling
B CCS Signaling
C none
Feature Use
By default, the system will configure Tl boards added by an administrator to contain two trunks each carrying CAS
signaling. The administrator is only to specify which specific signaling protocol is being used on each of the lines. By
the default the system will configure El boards added by an administrator to contain two trunks each carrying CCS
signaling (SS7). This default behavior is the same as previous loads.
The new menu is utilized only if a Tl board is to be used by an SS7 integration or, in the future, when an El board is
used for integrations such as R2. The selections apply to the following conditions
l
A-the lines on the trunk are using channel associated signaling (for example, loop
start, E&M, R2).
l
B-the lines on the trunk are controlled by a common channel signaliug integration
(SS7) and the trunk carries an SS7 link in one of the timeslots (timeslot 24 for Tl,
timeslot 16 for El).
l
C-the lines on the trunk are controlled by a common channel signaling integration
(SS7)and the trunk does not carry an SS7 link in one of the timeslots (all 24 timeslots

Software Release 6.OB Release Notes

on the Tl trunks are being used as VoiceMemo lines controlled by one or more SS7
links present on other trunks).

UI/ESMDI Integration
For UIESMDI integration, configure message waiting delay in the UI menu. From the UI menu, enter (P) Define PBX
Groups, (P) PBX Features, (L) Message Waiting Request Interval.
Valid interval range for message waiting delay is 0 - 1000 ms (0 - 1 set).

UIMAP Utility
A new UIMAP utility for merging multiple systems to a single 6.00 system and changing mapping information has been
added.
Note:
For 5.0X to 6.0 conversions in which two or more 5.0X systems are being
merged into one 6.0 system, the Conversion utility mentioned in the following
section must be run after each Phase II conversion from a 5.0X system. This
e
builds the new UI database incrementally.

UI Mailbox Mappings
A conversion utility has been added to Unified Integration mailbox mapping.
Conversion
Utility
(S) Save Mappings
(R) Restore
Mappings
(X) Exit
COMMAND (S/R/X):
When the userenters S,thefollowingmessageappears:
WARNING: To execute
OUT OF SERVICE for
Enter

a file

this
action
may keep
several
minutes!

name to

save

mappings

the

System

or RETURN to

quit:

If the user enters a file name, the utility saves all the mappings in the oaa records to that file. The file will be stored in
/usr/vm/map directory. This file is needed later to restore mappings to oaa records.
When user enter R, the following message appears:
WARNING: To execute
this
action
may keep the system
OUT OF SERVICE for several
minutes!
Enter

a file

name to

restore

mappings

or RETURN to

If the user enters a file name, the utility will prompt the user with the following message:
Enter a PBX number to modify
or RETURN to

no change:

The utility will read the file and restore mappings in oaa records and memory.

Note:
l

While running, this utility will not be interrupted by control C.

quit:

Software Release 6.OB Release Notes

The utility first checks if uimap is running on the system. It starts uimap if it is
not running and terminates uimap when exiting this utility.
If there is any errors while saving or restoring mappings, this utility will print
error messages and terminate.

Unified TCP/IP Installation
The installation for the Unified TCP/IP product requires that the user insert the setup floppy twice, once at the normal
time and once after removing Disk 1 of this optional feature. The user is prompted to follow this procedure by the
installation software. If this step is ignored, reinstallation of the software will be needed. Note also that Unified TCPLIP
requires a reboot of the system after installation and activation.

Software Release 6.OB Release Notes

From the SYSTEM MAINTE NANCE - Additional Options Menu, enter a to add optional features. Follow the
instrnctions that appear on the screen. The text that follows shows the messages that appear (bold lettering added):
Now installing
Unified
TCP/IP...
The software

package

vol:

When drive

vol:
used

volume 1 created
on /dev/fdO

Restoration

light

Installing

Type
have

be installed

goes

out

insert

27/Jan/96-14:25

from

disk

drive:

/dev/fdO

1 and press

by root,

687296

return
bytes

complete.

When drive
light
press return

goes

TCP/IP

WARNING:
initialized!

will

the

out,

protocol

Unified

SETUP diskette
9

insert

and

again

stack...

TCP/IP

records

are

going

to be

'CONTINUE'
the Unified

TCP/IP installed,
configuration.

continue

please

this

press

process.

ENTER to

Or,

keep

if.you

your

already

current

CONTINUE
Initializing

TCP/IP

records........done!

cp:

Can’t

open

source

file.

(/usr/vm/config/tcp.init)

cp:

Can't

open

source

file.

(/usr/vm/config/tcp.init.O)

cp:

Can't

open

source

file.

(/usr/vm/config/tcp.host)

cp:

Can't

open

source

file.

(/Usr/vm/config/tcp.host.O)

[Note:

Unified

The error messages shown above do not affect the successful installation
the Unified TCP/lP software.]

Software Release 6.OB Release Notes

/usr/vm/config/tcp.host:
Unified
Do you

OFFLINE

TCP/IP
want

No such
Optional
install

active

Reading

configuration

another

MENU: configuration

Currently

Checking

Feature

file

or directory
now installed....

Optional

Feature

? N

configuration

is:

records...

consistency

between

hardware

Writing
new configuration
/usr/vm/config/vm.report.l...

report

Writing
new configuration
/usr/vm/config/vm.cmd.l...

commands

configuration

writing

/usr/vm/config/tcp.init.l

.. ...

TCPIP:

writing

/usr/vm/config/tcp.host.l

... ..

CONFIGURATION

and OAA...

TCPIP:

WARNING : ACTIVATE

[Y/N]

enable

changes

Software Release 6.OB Release Notes

Known Problem
This section describes a known problem in Release 6.OB.

Originate/Answer

Link Conventions

In Mesa-Net

In certain configurations, after an activation of configuration or reboot, MESA-Net link assignments changed to earlier or
incorrect originate/answer assignments. Link and Port assignment may now be set to configurations other than
Centigram conventions for originate links as odd numbers and answer links as even numbers. For ease of service and
support, Centigram recommends that the orig=odd, ans=even assignments remain as the convention for link/port
assignment.

Issue 1 Release 2.0 January 1996

1 Voice

Processing

Solutions

System
Description

‘.

REPRODUCTION
Licensed users and authorized distributors of Centigram products may cozy
this document for use with Centigram products provided that the copyright
notice above is included in all reproductions.

NOTICE

The information contained in this document is believed to be accurate in all
respects but is not warranted by Mite1Corporation (MITEL@).The information
is subject to change without notice and should not be construed in any way
as a commitment by Mite1 or any of its affiliates or subsidiaries. Mite1and its
affiliates and subsidiaries assume no responsibility for any errors or omissions
in this document. Revisions of this document or new editions of it may be
issued to incorporate such changes.
--

Table of Contents
SECTION

1: INTRODUCTION

......... ... ........ .. ............................................ ...... ........................~1

SECTION

2: THE SERIES 6 MODEL . .... .... .............................................. ...... ..........~..............2

SECTION

3: THE TELEPHONE

USER INTERFACE

..........................................................4

3.1 WE SPEAK YOUR LANGUAGE ..........................................................................................................

3.2 MESSAGING FOR THE HEARING-IMPAIRED .......................................................................................
3.3 GUESTMEMO USER INTERFACE.. .....................................................................................................

3.4 ONLY THE HIGHEST QUALITY WILL Do.. ........................................................................................

SECTION

4: MESA-FLEX

- MAILBOX

FEATURES

AND CAPABILITIES

......................

4.1 FEATURE CLASSES OF SERVICE (FCOS) ...........................................................................................

4.2 LIMITS CLASS OF SERVICE (LCOS) ..................................................................................................

4.3 GROUP CLASS OF SERVICE (GCOS) .................................................................................................

4.4 NETWORK CLASS OF SERVICE (NCOS) ............................................................................................

4.5 RESTRICTED CLASS OF SERVICE (RCOS) ........................................................................................

-9

4.6 TENANT CLASS OF SERVICE (TCOS) ..............................................................................................

SECTION

5: OUTSIDE

CALLER

FEATURES .....................................................................11

5.1 TELEPHONE ANSWERMG ...............................................................................................................

.I 1

5.2 AUTOMATED RECEPTIONIST ..........................................................................................................
5.3 CALLAGENT ......................................................................................................
r.. ...........................

.11

5.4 MAILBOX ON DEMAND ...................................................................................................................

SECTION

6: MAILBOX

OWNER FEATURES .....................................................................15

6.1 NOTIFICATION .................................................................................................................................

6.2 E&VIEW MESSAGES.. .......................................................................................................................

6.3 RECORDING AND SENDING MESSAGES ...........................................................................................

6.4 MAILBOX CUSTOMLZATION ............................................................................................................

6.5 ADVANCED SUBSCRIBER FEAXJRES.. .............................................................................................

SECTION

7: MULTIMEDIA

MESSAGING

WITH

ONEVIEW

.........................................22

7.1 EASIER AND FASTER MESSAGING ..................................................................................................

7.2 FAXMEMO AND ONEVIEW .............................................................................................................

7.3 SAVING MESSAGES ........................................................................................................................

7.4 ONEVIEW REMOTE ........................................................................................................................

SECTION

8: APPLICATION

MAILBOXES

..........................................................................24

8.1 GREETING ONLY .............................................................................................................................
8.2 TREE ................................................................................................................................................
8.3 CHAIN..............................................................................................................................................

24
24
24

Page ii

8.4 ROTATIONAL...-....................................................~~.............................................~.........-.-...--..-..-....
25
8.5 BROADCAST........................................ ............................................................................................25
26
8.6 MESA-FORMS . . . .. . .. .. . .. .. .. .. . .. . . .. .. . .. . .. . .. .. .. .. .. . . .. . . .. . .. .. .. . .. .. .. . .. . . .. . . .. ...~..........-.......~............................
8.7 SHAREDEXTENSION
26
..... .......................................................................................-.............-.-.-..--....
8.8 GUARANTEEDFAX........ ...........................................................~.........................................~.
.. . .. . . . . .. 26
8.9WtiKAWAYFfi
26
.......... ..........................................................................................-........-......-.......

SECTION 9: SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION
......................................................................... 28
28
9.1 FLJN~TIONALLYPARTITIONEDSYSTEMADMMISTRATION(FPSA)
...............................................
9.2 BILLINGAND REPORTING ...............................................................................................................
29
30
9.3 AI~MI-NNISTRATI~NBy TELEPHONE ..................................................................................................
9.4 SYSTEMBACKUPAND RESTORE............................................................-.-.........-...-......................-3 1
31
9.5 MESSAGEPURGE
.............................................................................................................................
4
31
~.~TELNETAccEss ..............................................................................................................................
SECTION

10: SECURITY

........................................................................................................ 32

10.1 DISASTER RECOVERY ...................................................................................................................

SECTION

11: NETWORKING

11.1 MESA-NET

................................................................................................ 34

...................................................................................................................................

11.2 AMIS ................................................................
..-.........................................................................3
7
SECTION 12: SWITCH INTEGRATIONS ............................................................................. 38
12.1PBX INTEGRATIONS.........................................................-............~....-....-............-.....-..................3
8
12.2. INTEGRATION..............................................................
..-...........................~........................~...3
8
12.3 SS7 iNTEGRATION.........................................................................................................................3
9
13: ARCHITECTURE
............................................................................................ 40
13.1 THE MESA DESIGN STRATEGY...........................................................................-...-....................4
0
13.2 FUNCTIONALOVERVIEW............................................................................................................
..43
13.3 SHAREDRESOURCE
FAX.......................................................................................~.......................~
8

SECTION

APPENDIX

I: CLASS OF SERVICE DESCRIPTIONS

APPENDIX

II: LINE CARD EXCEPTIONS

APPENDIX

III:

LINE CARD INTERFACES

62
...........~..-.........~.....~.~.~..-....~.............

.... ... .... ...............~.........~..........~.~..~..............~....~.
76
83
.. ..0...............................~..~.............~..........~....~...

Page iii

Section 1: Introductidn

‘.-

Centigram’s Series6 system offers a multitude of unique, user-friendly voice and fa
store-and-forward, call processingand multimedia messagingapplications. These include
VoiceMemo, FaxMemo, CallAgent and OneView respectively. All of these applicationsare
easilyaccessiblefrom any touch-tonetelephoneusing single-digitcommands. VoiceMemo and
FaxMemo also may be accessedthrough any PC using OneView. Some examplesof Series6
applicationsinclude:
Paginga mailboxownerwhen a new voice or fax mail messagearrives
Schedulingautomaticwakeupcallsto any telephoneat any dateandtime
Using the telephoneto downloada fax messageto any fax machineat any time now
or in the future
Recording a voice and/or fax messageand having it automatic&y distributed to
thousandsof people
Delivering new, unplayedvoice or fax messagesto an on- or off-system telephone
numberof choice
Faxing a Windows document from a PC with voice annotation to multiple
destinations,without usingthe PC fax modem
Routing callersto predetermineddestinationsbasedon time of day, day of week, or
dayof year
Allowing callersto record messagesand have them deliveredto subscriberswithout
mailboxes
The VoiceMemo, FaxMemo, CallAgent and OneView products are simple in design and
operation. The software architecturehas beenkept simple, so customizationand upgradingare
not unnecessarilycomplex or expensivefor the user. All of these applicationsreside on the
Series6 platform.
Four different Series6 platform models are availableto provide communicationsolutions for
- businesses:
l

Model 70-serves smallerinstallationswith up to 24 ports and 55 hours of redundant
speechstorage
Model 1201--servesmid size installations with up to 32 ports and 55 hours of
redundantspeechstorage
Model 120S-serves large size installationswith up to 60 ports and 480 hours of
redundantspeechstorage
Model 640-provides up to 240 ports with 1440 hours of redundant speech
storage12800
hoursnon-redundantspeechstorage

Page1

Section 2: The Series 6 Model
Because all of Centigram’s application products are supported on the Series 6 platform they can
be integrated to provide advanced features and functions. Moreover, all of these features and
functions are accessible from the most ubiquitous, user-friendly terminal: the touch-tone
telephone. Centigram also offers complete desktop control of voice and fax messages from a
windows-based. PC.
So what does this mean for the end user?
With the Series 6 system, the end user can retrieve voice and fax mail messages from any
touch-tone telephone or PC. If they are traveling or do not have access to their computer, they
can listen to their e-mail messages from any touch-tone telephone (using text-to-speech
technology), or have them downloaded to any fax machine. Corporate data residing in
mainframe computers can be accessed using telephones or facsimile machines 24 hours a day,
without the intervention of human operators.
Exhibit 2-l is a matrix of some of the possible communications solutions enabled by the Series 6
platform.
Exhibit 2-2 details the four application products that provide the underlying
capabilities for developing these solutions.

Exhibit 2-l

Answering/CallAgent

Page 2

Exhibit 2-2
VoiceMemo

Offers feature-rich voice store-and-forward&nctions
These include voice messaging, telephone answering, audiotext, outdialing
functions such as paging, message delivery, mailbox on demand and call
placement, and voice forms.

FaxMemo

Permits facsimile store-and-forwardfinctions
Enables users to send, receive, give, answer, voice annotate, and distribute fax
messages. Provides for automatic and/or scheduled delivery of information
via facsimile.

CallAgent

Provides comprehensive call processing and call handling :apabilities
Allows users and administrators to configure applications to answer calls,
play messages and route callers (on- or off-system) without human
intervention. Provides audiotext customization.

OneView

Provides multimedia messaging@om a PC
Enables mailbox owners to use a PC to view all messages in their mailbox
and to play, make, answer, give, keep and delete their voice and fax messages.

TDDMemo

Provides messaging capabilities for the hearing impaired.
Works with telecommunications devices for the deaf (TDDs), allowing
system prompts to be displayed on the user’s TDD screen.

Voice Gateway

Provides Full-finction

Interactive Voice Response capabilities

Offers online access to any information on any database or host computer
with information delivery via digitized voice, text-to-speech conversion, or
facsimile transmission.

Page 3

Section 3: The Telephone User Interface’
Human factors always have been a paramount consideration in the engineering of the
VoiceMemo and FaxMemo user interface. Centigram was the first company to offer mnemonic
prompts, an online user tutorial, single-digit prompts and system administration from a
telephone.
Mnemonic prompts provide easy-to-remember commands for each step of the call process. In
addition, all commands are single digit, and menus are structured to present the most frequently
chosen options first. The learning process for new users is accelerated, since it quickly becomes
second nature to press “P” to play or “A” to answer a message, for example. Outside callers also
can remember multiple menu items better, because keystrokes have a direct association with the
corresponding operations. Once the user is comfortable with the prompts, they may override
them.
e
Coupled with a friendly user interface is a mailbox tutorial for every nest mailbox on the system.
The user is guided through this tutorial the first time they log into their mailbox. During the
tutorial, the user learns about all messaging capabilities and customization features available in
their mailbox. In addition, the user is led through the process of recording their name, a personal
greeting, and a secret passcode. After the initial tutorial is completed, a user can access the
tutorial again at any time through the “User Options” menu in their mailbox. If a user does not
wish to hear the tutorial the first time they log into their mailbox, the system administrator may
disable it.
Since Series 6 system commands are easy to remember, users take advantage of advanced
features. Corporate employees who begin by using the system just to take messages discover
that, simply by pressing the A key, they can answer messages from other employees, and even
hold “conferences” through voice messages. Service providers find they can migrate their
customers to increasingly sophisticated levels of service as the customers discover how simple
even the advanced features of the VoiceMemo and FaxMemo system are to use.
VoiceMemo and FaxMemo prompts are context-sensitive. After listening to a message, the user
can press “A” to Answer it; after recording a message, the user can press “A” to Append to it.
During a message playback, a user can press T to go to the Top of the next message; after
hearing a fax message has arrived, a user can press T for fax Transmittal options. The
experienced user can override prompts with DTMF tones, and even enter an entire string of
commands at one time. The Series 6 system retains and executes these commands in the order in
which they are entered. Help is always available; the user simply waits for the prompt menu to
be replayed. If the user presses an incorrect key, the system issues an informative error message,
such as “I’m sorry; I did not understand that command,” followed by prompts for the options
available at that time.

’ See Section 7, “Multimedia

Messaging with OneView” for an explanation of the desktop user interface.

Page 4

3.1

We Speak Your Language

In addition to English mnemonic prompts, numeric prompts are available on the VoiceMemo and
FaxMemo applications in English, Australian English, British English, New Zealand English,
Canadian French, German, Japanese, Korean, Latin American Spanish, Mandarin, Mexican
Spanish and Portuguese. Each Series 6 system can offer from three to eleven additional full
language sets in addition to English. Prompt languages are assigned by line group, which is
particularly useful in international applications. Customers who speak French can be given the
pilot number for a line group where French prompts are played, and Spanish-speaking customers
can be given a number on the same system that issues Spanish prompts. Prompt languages also
may be assigned to individual mailboxes, through the mailbox’s class of service.

3.2

Messaging for the Hearing-Impaired

In addition to foreign languages, Series 6 systems optionally offer TDDMemo, which is used
with TDDs (telecommunications devices for the deaf). With TDDMemo, every spoken prompt
on Centigram’s system has been converted to Baudot tones (the tones all TDDs send and
receive). This allows system prompts to be displayed on the user’s TDD screen. TDDMemo
prompts function just like VoiceMemo prompts, telling the user how many new messages they
have, instructing them how to perform an action, and allowing users to interrupt prompts and
choose an action. TDDMemo prompts require a full-set language slot on the Series 6 system.

3.3

GuestMemo User Interface

Centigram prompts are available in two versions: the regular full-set (described above) and the
GuestMemo set for the lodging environment. All systems ship with the full-set prompts, but
these may be overlaid with the GuestMemo prompts for hotel or motel customers. GuestMemo
prompts differ from the regular full-set prompts in three important ways:
1. GuestMemo prompts are shorter than the full set prompts (since hotel guests do not
need to perform all VoiceMemo functions).
2. GuestMemo English prompts are alphanumeric (e.g., “Press P the 7 key to play the
first message”). GuestMemo foreign language prompts are numeric.
3. Each Series 6 system can accommodate from 3 to 11 GuestMemo prompt languages
in addition to English.
4. GuestMemo prompts in American English are available in both “overlay” and in
“standalone” form. Overlay hotel prompts will load on top of American English
mnemonic prompts. Standalone hotel prompts require a full language slot on the
Series 6.

Page 5

GuestMemoprompts make it easy for hotels and motels to offer customizedservice to their
guests,througheasy-to-usevoice mail in their nativetongue. GuestMemoprompts can evenbe
playedin onelanguage,suchas Mandarin,for a guest,and anotherlanguage,suchasEnglish, for
an outsidecallerleaving a messagefor that guest,

3.4

Only the Highest Quality Will Do

Series6 systemssupport high quality prompts, namesand greetings. Prompts are availablein
24 kbps. Names, greetings,and messagesare availablein 18.3kbps, 24 kbps and 32 kbps.
Speechand prompt quality can be configured systemwide,on a line group level, or on an
individualmailbox level.
32 kbps greetings can be used to provide highqnality company information (audiotext)
mailboxes,or serviceprovider bulletin boards.24 kbps prompts are usedto ‘enhancethe quality
of theuser interface,andserviceproviderscould price mailbox servicesdifferently for mailboxes
with differing speechquality.

Page 6

Section 4: MESA-Flex - Mailbox Features and Capabilities
Centigram has substantialexperienceselling into both the service provider and WE markets.
Servingboth marketshas given Centigrama uniqueinsight into the messagingneedsof a broad
baseof user communities,andthe different featuresand capabilitiesrequiredfor their particular
businessapplications. The Series6 serversatisfiesthesediverseneedsthrough MESA-Flex, a
designtool that allowsan administratorto definethe featuresand capabilitiesof a mailbox.
MESA-Flex allows a systemadministratorto enablevoice and fax mailboxeswith a uniqueset
of features,capabilities,andparameters.There are over 300 capabilitiesthat can be assignedby
MESA-Flex and thesemay be configuredinto over 107 million distinct classesof serviceon a
single system. Classesof serviceand individual featuresmay be changedeffortlessly and as
often as desiredon an individualmailbox level. In addition, thesechangescan be madeonline
while the systemis processingcalls.
*.
MESA-Flex provides this designflexibility through six distinct classesof service categories,
which can be programmedand assignedindependentlyof one another. Theseare the Feature
Class of Service (FCOS), Limits Class of Service (LCOS), Group Class of Service (GCOS),
Network Class of Service (NCOS), Restricted Class of Service (RCOS) and Tenant Class of
Service(TCOS).
4.1

Feature Classes of Service (FCOS)

When callers contact the Indianapolis Convention and Visitor’s Association they hear a
welcominggreetingandarepresentedwith four choices: press1 on a touch-tonephoneto record
their addressfor a visitor’s guidemailing; press2 to hear information on attractionsand events;
press3 to hear descriptionsof local hotels and, if desired,to transferto the hotel of their choice
to makea reservation;or press4 to speakto a representativeof the association.Callerson rotary
phonesare automaticallytransferredto a representative.
All theseoptionscanbe implementedon any Series6 system.-The IndianapolisConventionand
-Visitor’s Associationsimply took advantageof the powerful FeatureClass of Service(FCOS)
capabilitiesthat are part of every system. Every mailbox on the systemhas a unique set of
featuresthat are enabledby featurebits. Basedon software release6.0, the Series6 systemhas
over 250 different featurebits. Thesefeaturesrangefrom basicuserprivilegessuchasthe ability
to ‘receive messagesfrom outside callers, to specializedoperations like fax broadcasting.
Combiningfeaturebits createsan FCOS, which definesthe capabilitiesof an individual mailbox.
Centigram’s rich FCOS structure means that our customers can create many specialized
applicationswithout purchasingnew softwareor hardware. The systemdoesnot force you to use
a set of preprogrammedchoices. Default FCOS are included in the system configuration to
allow the systemadministratorto createmailboxesimmediatelyafter the systemis installed,but
theseFCOS definitions can be modified by addingor deletingfeature bits. An exampleis the

Page7

GreetingOnly FCOS,which plays a greetingto an outsidecaller (suchasmovie listings, weather
information, or storehours),then hangsup.
Eachmailbox on the systemcan have a unique set of featuresand capabilities. Fax capabilities
(fax broadcasting,fax on demand, fax store-and-forward,guaranteedfax, walkaway fax) and
special mailboxes (tree, broadcast, check-in/check-out)are examples of features enabledby
feature bits. Every mailbox can be customizedwith a unique FCOS, which can be changed
easily andas often as necessaryby the system administrator. If a user’s mailbox is assignedto
an FCOS that excludesa specific feature, the user will not hear any prompts that refer to that
feature.
FCOS is usedin one of three distinct ways. First, it is often valuableto differentiate a novice
user from an experienceduser and to provide advancedmailbox featuresfor experiencedusers
only. This minimizestraining and supportrequirementsassociatedwith systemimplementation.
Second,FCOS is often usedto match a mailbox to the requirementsof a ipecific application.
Examplesincluderotational mailboxesfor audiotext,check-in/check-outmailboxesfor lodging,
and hands-freemailboxesfor cellular phoneusers. Third, FCOS is usedby serviceprovidersto
build several distinct tiers of messagingservice. Each tier has a richer functionality which
generatesadditionalrevenuefor the serviceprovider. Up to 640 FCOS can be programmedto
defineuniquemailbox functionality. PleaseseeAppendix 1 for a list of featurebits by category.

4.2

Limits Class of Service (LCOS)

LCOS definesall of the operatingparametersof a mailbox by restricting message,greeting,and
outdialingdigit lengths. Theseparametersallow the systemadministratorto control the use of
the systemresources.They are frequently usedin conjunctionwith FCOS to build multiple tiers
of service offerings. Like FCOS, they can be configured and changedonline by the system
administrator.
Language prompts (English, Australian English, British English, New Zealand English,
CanadianFrench, German, Japanese,Korean, Latin American Spanish,Mandarin, Mexican
SpanishandPortuguese).
Up to 640 LCOS can be programmedto quantify different categoriesof parameters. A list of
theseparametersis includedin Appendix 1.

4.3

Group Class of Service (GCOS)

The GCOS defines mailboxes with which a user can exchangemessages.GCOS provides
software partitioning at the mailbox level, without requiring partitioning at the line group level.
This class of service category allows the VoiceMemo and FaxMemo applications to be
configuredas either closedor flexible communitiesof interest,all servedby the samemultiline
hunt group(MLHG).
Page 8

There are two types of GCOS assignments: bit-mapped, flexible GCGS that can accommodate
multiple member groups within a GCOS, and simple GCOS groups, that only one level of
affinity communication.
More than 64 flexible, bit-mapped GCOSs can be programmed. A mailbox can be assigned to
one, some, or all of these GCOSs. That mailbox can then exchange messages with any other
mailbox that is a member of any common GCOS. As an example, a hierarchy of messaging can
be built, so that the president of a company can communicate with any of the senior staff, staff
can communicate with the president, with each other, or within the department, but lower level
department members can only talk to their senior staff representative, not with the president and
not across departmental lines.
Up to 32,000 GCOSs can be built as simple affinity groups. Mailboxes assigned to these GCOSs
can only communicate with each other and do not enjoy the hierarchy that w& described above.
Affinity groups allow the system to be partitioned into “virtual” systems, so that a single system
can be shared by many different user communities or organizations. With GCOS, this can be
done confidentially and transparently to the distinct user groups.

4.4

Network

Class of Service (NCOS)

NCOS works in conjunction with Centigram’s MESA-Net digital networking products and
allows the system administrator to regulate user access to and priority on the digital network. A
mailbox’s NCOS controls communications between users in one location with users on a
Series 6 system in another location. A list of NCOS parameters can be found in Appendix 1.

4.5

Restricted Class of Service (RCOS)

The RCOS is used to provide NPA/NXX screening, which in turn allows a system administrator
to screen all outgoing VoiceMemo and FaxMemo calls (e.g., fax retrieval, auto wakeup, message
delivery, paging). NPA/NXX screening takes place at both the toll (central office) level and the
- area code (long distance) level. And, because system administrators can configure a different
RCOS for every mailbox owner on the system, each mailbox can have a different screening
configuration. NPA/NXX screening can take place in two different ways:
l

Allow users to outcall to any number except those specified in the RCOS

Allow users only to outcall to those numbers specified in the RCOS

A mailbox owner can be allowed to download faxes to all numbers in the 415,408 and 5 10 area
codes only, or to all area codes except 5 15. Alternatively, NPA/NXX can provide additional
security enhancements to the Series 6 system by protecting it against toll abuse. Using RCOS,
any specified mailboxes can be prohibited from making 976 or’ 900 calls. In addition, more

Page9

flexibility can be given to traveling employees to send messages, faxes, and pages to long
distance numbers, versus local employees, who only may need to deliver faxes to an internal
extension. With NPA/NXX, system administrators have complete flexibility in designing the
appropriate limitations on an individual mailbox basis.

4.6

Tenant Class of Service (TCOS)

The TCOS was introduced in VoiceMemo’s software release 5.01. This applies only to systems
using the Unified Integration capability, which supports up to 32 different switches and up to 56
different tenant groups to share the same Series 6 system. The TCOS controls what outside
callers hear and how they are routed within and across the multiple line groups of a shared tenant
application.

Page 10

Section 5: Outside Caller Features
There are four types of outside caller features: Telephone Answering, Automated Receptionist,
CallAgent, and Mailbox on Demand.

5.1

Telephone Answering

An example of telephone answering is when a caller reaches an extension and is transferred to
VoiceMemo to record a message. After recording their message, outside callers can be given the
oppormnity to:
l

Replay their message

Re-record their message

5.2

Mark their message urgent so it is placed in the front of the mailbox owner’s message
queue
Have the mailbox owner paged and enter a callback number to be displayed on the
pager

Leave a message for another mailbox on the system

Be transferred to the operator or any extension on the switch.

Automated

Receptionist

Automated Receptionist II is an optional feature that answers incoming phone calls and asks the
caller to enter the extension number of the party they wish to reach. If they do not know the
extension number of the party, they can spell out the name on the telephone keypad. Once the
extension has been entered, the system will transfer the caller to the desired party’s extension.
_ Calls may be transferred blind, supervised, or screened. If it is a blind transfer, the system hangs
up once the extension is dialed. If it is a supervised transfer, the system stays on line until the
caller gets through to the desired extension. If the extension is busy or ring-no-answer, the call is
pulled back and the caller can choose to leave a message in the called party’s mailbox, or be
~ transferred to another extension. A screened transfer is when the called party is forewarned who
is calling and can choose to accept or reject the call. Again, if the called party chooses not to
answer the call, the caller may leave a message in the called party’s mailbox or be transferred to
another extension. The options available to a caller (transferring to another extension or leaving
messages in mailboxes) are configured by the system administrator.

Page11

5.3

CallAgent

CallAgent provides advancedcall processing capability for Centigram’s Series6 systems.
;
CallAgentis designedfor flexibility andallows you to:
l

Designcomplexcall processingapplications

Build powerful automatedattendantsfor your company

Createcustomizedaudiotextandinformation deliveryapplications

Utilize multiple call processingapplicationson eachline group

Configureevery extensionwith its own uniquecall processingoptions

Createcustomizeddepartmentcall processingapplications

Programor changeyour call processingapplicationsat any tune Lsing a touch-tone
telephone

CallAgent is a powerful tool designedto allow users to build customized call processing
applications. In most instances,every departmentor individual in a companywill not require
their own call box. Call boxesare primarily usedon an exceptionbasis,for thoseindividualsor
departmentswho requirespecialcall processing. Usershavea numberof featuresto selectfrom
to build in their specificapplications. The key building block for all applicationsis the call box,
which is describedin the next section.
The Call Box

CallAgent’s flexibility stems from its modular architecture,which uses combinationsof call
boxesto build call processingapplications. Justas a voice mailbox handlesall the voice and fax
messagingfor the Centigramplatform, a call box handlesall the call processing. A call box
allows usersto selectany or all of the featuresneededfor a specific call processingapplication.
Call processingapplicationscanbe createdusingoneor more call boxes.
-

Overview

Thefunctionalityprovidedby the call box is divided into the following six segments:
Override

If enabled,the override segmentwill supersedethe remainderof the call
box and take a predefmedaction such as transferring to an extensionor
anothercall box.

Holiday Schedule

Routes callers dependingon the day of the year. The user can set up
holiday call processingup to one year in advance. Each year the holiday
scheduleis automatically updatedby CallAgent, basedon the holidays
selectedthe previousyear.
Page 12

Weekly Schedule

Routes callers depending on the time of day and day of week.

Greeting

Plays a user-recorded greeting.

Plays a user-recorded menu a user-defmable number of times. This
segment will also route callers depending on their single-key or multikey
DTMF inputs.

Auto Exit

If no other segment has routed the caller, auto exit will route the caller
based on a predefmed action.

The picture on the right graphically
represents a call box. Every call is
processed sequentially through each
call box segment, beginning with the
first segment, override. If callers are
not routed or transferred out of the
call box by the override segment,
they are passed on to the next
segment, schedule. Callers move
through the call box until they are
processed appropriately. A screen
example of the main call box
configuration screen showing each
of the call box segments is included
in the Administration section of the
CallAgent Product Note.

Calls

Page 13

Cdl Box Actions
Call box actions are the transfer and routing functions available within each call box segment.
Depending on the call box segment, certain actions are possible and some are not possible.
CallAgent can automatically route callers to call boxes, extensions and mailboxes, or take touchtone input from the caller and route them to the specified selection. The primary actions
available are depicted in the following picture of an “action box” taken from an actual CallAgent
screen.
SUP
BLND
ALT
SCRN
AT-ND
DISC
MBX
UND
CONT
DBN

SupervisedTransfer
Blind Transfer
Alternate Transfer
ScreenedTransfer
Attendant
Disconnect
Mailbox
Undefined
Continue in Callbox
Dial-by-Name

CallAgent Release 1.1 supports the 18.3, 24 and 32 kbps speech compression rates available in
Series 6. Users can set the compression rate for each individual call box to improve speech
quality. Transfers f?om the Menu and Auto Exit segments to a VoiceMemo mailbox can now be
set to skip the mailbox greeting. CallAgent Release 1.l also allows administrators to program
lo-digit telephone digits through the telephone interface, allowing users to transfer calls to
different area codes. Finally, with Series 6, CallAgent billing information is provided through
the Enhanced Call Detail Recording (CDR) option.

5.4

Mailbox on Demand

Mailbox on Demand is a feature that allows an outside caller to record a voice and/or fax
message for a subscriber who does not have a mailbox, and have that message delivered to the
subscriber. The outside caller benefits by having the opportunity to communicate non-real time
with a subscriber whom they otherwise would not be able to reach.
This feature is valuable to both CPE and Service Provider customers. In the CPE market,
mailboxes could be created on the fly for students who do not have voice mail, guaranteeing that
outside callers, professors and other students can effectively communicate with students who are
often difficult to reach. In the Service Provider market, mailbox on demand allows csulers to
leave a message for the mobile subscriber, who by definition is a moving target.
Mailbox on Demand is also a network subscriber feature, and its use as such is described in
section 6.5.

Page 14

Section 6: Mailbox Owner Features
6.1

Notification

Message waiting lights usually are sufficient to notify a user that they have new messages, zythe
user is located next to their telephone. However, there are more and more individuals who do
not regularly work at a specific office location or desk. For these people, a message waiting light
is not very useful. In response to this situation, Centigram has created numerous ways in which a
user can be notified of a new message. These include paging, cut-through paging and message
delivery options.
Paging notification allows for real-time notification of voice and fax messages. The Series 6
system supports all commercially available pagers. If the pager is a voice pager, the system will
deliver the first 30 seconds of the voice message. It can also send customized alphanumeric
messages to paging subscribers. The system supports integration to the widest variety of paging
systems via dialup, and most recently, telocator network paging protocol (TNPP).
The system allows for paging customization. First, the mailbox owner can designate up to two
primary and two alternative pager numbers. Second, the mailbox can be configured to page at
certain intervals or frequencies, or for urgent messagesonly.
Cut-through paging allows an outside caller or a mailbox user to send a callback number to a
digital pager. Normally when an outside caller leaves a message, only the user’s mailbox
number is sent to the digital display pager. With cut-through paging, a user &m circumvent their
mailbox and contact the caller directly, using the callback number. The caller also has the option
of leaving a voice or fax message in the user’s mailbox Z& leaving a callback number.
Message Delivery is another convenient and timely way to deliver new messages to mailbox
owners who work off-site or who are working away from their telephone. If a user decides to
work out of their home, they can bypass the need to call into voice mail every hour by using
message delivery. The system will call the user at home (or wherever the user precontigured the
- system to call) every time a new message arrives. When the phone is answered, the system will
prompt, “Hello . You have unplayed messages in your mailbox.
Please enter your passcode.” Once entered, the system prompts the user with the main menu
(e.g. “press P to Play your first message, M to Make a new message” etc.)
Like other notification features, message delivery allows the user to set the telephone number,
specify the hours available for message delivery, and, through the system administrator, to
specify the types of messagesto deliver (urgent only, for example).

Page 15

6.2

Review Messages

After being notified of new messages,a user calls into the system,logs into their mailbox, and
hearshow many new and savedmessagesthey have. The user then can chooseto listen to all,
some or none of the messages(urgent messagesfast, unplayedmessagessecond,and saved
messagesthird), listen to a messagemultiple times, move forward/backwardwithin the message,
pause,or skip to the next or previousmessagein queue. Once played,any messagecan be kept
or deleted. All messages
containa time and datestampandthe sender’sname.
After listeningto a message,the user can answerthe messageautomaticallywithout having to
hangup or dial anotherextension. The original messagecan be attachedto the reply to remind
the messagesenderof the subjectmatter. If the user chooses,they also can give the original
messageto one or more recipientsalong with their own comments. All of theseoptions can be
configuredat the mailbox level, giving the userthe ability to customizetheir own mailbox.

6.3

Recording and Sending Messages

In additionto receivingandplaying messages,a mailbox owner can “make” a messageand send
it to one or more destinationsfrom within their mailbox. Once a mailbox owner requeststo
make a message,they are askedto indicatethe messagedestination. With the Series6 system,
userscan sendmessages
to the following destinations:
l

Anothermailbox on the system

A mailbox on a networkedsystem

An off-systemtelephonenumber

0 A network subscriberwithout a mailbox
0 A mailbox on anothervendor’svoice mail system
l

A distributionlist containingany of the above

A broadcastmailbox containingany of the above

Any combinationof these

Call Placementallows mailbox owners to send messagesto off-system (e.g., non-subscriber)
telephoneor fax numbers. When the messageis sent to an off-system telephone number,
VoiceMemoimmediatelyoutdialsthe off-system telephonenumber and attemptsto deliver the
message.If VoiceMemocannotdeliver a messageon the first attempt,the systemwill try again
at regularintervalsfor a specifiedlength of time. Both the retry interval and time length can be
adjusted by the system administrator. When the call is answered,VoiceMemo tells the
answeringparty who the call is for and who it is from. The recipientmay accept,reject, or delay
the call. After listeningto the message,VoiceMemo allows the recipientto leavea messagefor

Page 16

the messageoriginator. In any case,VoiceMemowill notify the caller if the messagecould not
be delivered. If the messageis an off-system fax, FaxMemo will not play the above-mentioned
prompts.
Mailbox ownerscan make messagesfor subscriberswho do not have a mailbox on the Series6
systemthroughthe Mailbox on Demandfeature. Mailbox on Demandmailboxescan be created
by mailbox owners through the “make” function just by entering the subscriber’sextension
numberand recordinga message.
In the caseof deliveringmessagesto mailboxeson other vendors’systems,the Series6 system
follows the Audio MessagingInterchangeSpecification(AMIS) standard.
Mailbox owners can sendvoice and/or fax messagesto multiple destinationsusing distribution
lists. Mailbox ownersmay useboth personaland systemdistribution lists to sendmessages.Up
to 99 personaldistribution lists may residein a mailbox owner’s mailbox, and’eachcan contain
65,535.members. Up to 99 systemdistribution lists with 65,535memberseachcan residein an
administrator’smailbox (one per linegroup), and can be accessedby mailbox owners on that
linegroup.
Broadcastmailboxescanbe madeavailableto both mailbox ownersand non-mailboxownersto
sendmessagesto multiple recipientsat onetime. Broadcastmailboxesusepersonaldistribution
lists to accomplishthis.
Whena userhas finishedrecordinga message,they can review it, deleteit andrerecord,or send
it. The Series6 systemallows a user to sendmessageswith a numberof delivery options. An
examplewould be an urgentmessagethat would be placedat the front of the recipient’smessage
queue. The following are examplesof messageaddressingdelivery options on the Series6
system:

6.4

Marking a messageurgent

Marking it confidential(so that it cannotbe given to anotheruser)

Settingit for future delivery

Requestinga return receipt(to seeif the recipientlistenedto the message)

Any combinationof the above

Mailbox Customization

Although the system administrator is responsiblefor creating and modifying mailboxes,the
Series6 systemallows usersto personalizetheir mailboxeswith the following features:

Page 17

Recording a name

Recording primary and conditional greetings

Setting the passcode

Creating personal distribution lists

Setting a default fax delivery number

Enabling/disabling automatic fax delivery

Retrieving all unplayed faxes at once

Activating the tutorial

Scheduling message delivery

Changing a message delivery number

Scheduling paging

Changing a pager number

Activating/scheduling auto wakeup

A mailbox user’s name recording is used in several places on the system. For example, when an
inside caller reaches a user’s mailbox, they first hear the name recording, verifying that they have
reached the correct mailbox extension. In addition, when a user logs into their mailbox to
retrieve their messages, they first hear their name recording. Finally, when a user retrieves a
message, they hear the name recording, identifying the person who left the message.

Users have the option of recording four multiple personal greetings: one primary personal
greeting and three conditional personal greetings. The three conditions are ring no answer, busy
and all caZZs
forward. When a caller reaches an extension that is not answered, the caller will
hear the no answer greeting. If the called extension is busy, the caller will hear the busy greeting,
stating that the called party is on another line. When the called extension is forwarded to
VoiceMemo, the caller will hear the forwarded greeting, notifying the caller that they have
reached the called party’s voice mailbox.
Passcode lengths can be 4-10 digits in length, and can be changed as often as a user wishes,
through the “User Options” menu. For more information on passcodes,see section 9, Security.
Personal distribution lists are used to send messages to a number of mailboxes at one time.
Distribution lists can be changed by the mailbox owner as often as is desired, through the “User
Options” menu. Distribution lists are virtually limitless: each mailbox can have up to 99
distribution lists, and each list can have up to 65,535 members.
Setting a default fax delivery number precludes the need to enter a fax machine number to
receive a fax. Instead, only one keystroke is necessary to download a fax from a user’s mailbox.

Page18

If a user enables automatic fax delivery, all fax messagessent to their mailbox automatically will
be delivered to their default fax number. These messagesalso will be stored in the user’s saved
queue. If the user is going on vacation and prefers not to have his/her fax messages downloaded
for a period of time, this option easily can be changed through the User Options menu.
Retrieve all unplayed faxes allows a mailbox owner to download multiple fax messages by
pressing a single key in the user options menu. All unplayed faxes in the user’s mailbox at that
time are concatenated and sent to the user’s default fax number.
A mailbox owner can choose to listen to the tutorial at any time by choosing the “activate
tutorial” option in the User Options menu.
A user can schedule the message delivery option to any telephone, using single-digit commands.
Message deliveries can be programmed to occur at any time or date, and can &sily be changed.
For example, if a mailbox owner is working at a different location for a day, they can program
the system to deliver all of their new or urgent messagesto that specified number, obviating the
need to constantly check their mailbox for new voice or fax messages.
Users can also choose a paging schedule and a pager number to be notified of all or urgent
messages only.

6.5

Advanced Subscriber Features

Automatic Wakeup
If you are having trouble hearing your alarm in the morning, you can schedule a wakeup call
from the VoiceMemo system any time, any day and anywhere. If the first call doesn’t wake you
up, you can program wakeup calls to occur multiple times at specified intervals, until you answer
the phone. If this feature becomes habit forming, users can schedule a wakeup call to occur
every day on a long-term basis.
- Mailbox on Demand
Mailbox on Demand allows network operators the opportunity to provide telephone answering
and messaging capability for their subscribers who do not own mailboxes. It can be used in
multiple ways, such as: ~
l

Allowing outside callers to record messages for subscribers who don’t own
mailboxes.
Allowing subscribers with mailboxes to leave messages for subscribers who don’t
own mailboxes.

Page 19

Notifying subscribers without mailboxes of new “Mailbox on Demand” messages
they have received through short message service (SMS), stutter dial tone, message
waiting lights, message delivery, paging, etc.

This is accomplished by having the system administrator create a template Mailbox on Demand
mailbox (the template with the appropriate classes of service is predefined on the Series 6 system
but can be modified) for one or more line groups. Once the template is created, outside callers or
mailbox owners can record messages for network subscribers who do not own mailboxes just by
calling them. A temporary mailbox is automatically created for the subscriber, and the
subscriber is notified of the new message.
Notification can occur in one or more ways, as defined in the template mailbox. It can be
through message delivery, in which case the Series 6 system outdials to the subscriber to send
them the actual recorded message left by the caller. It can occur through shoq message servicewhere an alphanumeric message is delivered to the mobile handset of the subscriber-notifying
them that they have unplayed messages and instructing them on how to retrieve them. It also can
occur through messagewaiting lights, stutter dial tone, or other message wait notification options
available on the Series 6 system.
The subscriber then logs into the mailbox on demand and listens to the unplayed message(s). At
midnight the mailbox is purged, unless there are unplayed messages that are less than two hours
old. A new mailbox on demand can be created when another caller dials the subscriber and is
unable to reach them. Both of these options are configurable by the system administrator in the
template mailbox.
Mailbox on Demand activity is tracked in Centigram’s Call Detail Recorder (CDR) billing
package. There are 26 fields which record details of mailbox on demand activity. Imormation
available for usage and/or billing includes:
l

Creation of mailbox on demand-including

Purge of mailbox on demand--including

date and time
date and time

0 Number of unplayed, urgent, and fa messages in a mailbox on demand
0 Number of messagesplayed, kept or discarded in a mailbox on demand
0 Number of minutes a subscriber was logged into a mailbox on demand
Mailbox on Demand benefits carriers by:

Increasing the number of subscribers who purchase and use voice mail by easily
introducing the concept to them.
Increasing airtime through increased call completion.

Page 20

Increasing airtime by having subscribers without mailboxes call in to get their
“Mailbox on Demand” messages.
Increasing revenues by billing subscribers for messagesreceived.
Reducing system administration time and costs by having Mailbox on Demand
mailboxes automatically created for subscribers, without system administrator
intervention.

Mailbox on Demand also allows subscribers the chance to receive messages from outside callers
and mailbox owners. When an outside caller is unable to reach a subscriber (the line is busy or
ring-no-answer), they are given the opportunity to record a message for the subscriber. A
Mailbox on Demand is automatically created, the message is placed in the mailbox, and the
subscriber is notified that they have a new message. Mailbox on Demand benefits subscribers
without mailboxes by allowing them to:
r.
l

Become familiar with the concept of voice mail.

Become familiar with the concept of fax mail.

Receive messages from callers who weren’t able to reach them real time.

Have messagesdelivered to them through message delivery (the Series 6 system dials
their number and attempts to deliver the message to them).
Receive notification that they have new messages.

Page 2 1

Section 7: Multimedia Messaging with OneView
OneView for Windows is a client software applicationthat operateswith the Series6 to provide
voice and fax messagingon the desktop PC. OneView allows users to manage,create, and
review their VoiceMemo and FaxMemo messagesfrom a PC. With OneView, users have
completecontrolover voiceand fax messagesand can:
l

Integratevoice andfax messagingwith their PC desktop

View all their messagesinstantly

Play,view, andcreatecompoundvoice and fax messages

Deliver faxescost-effectivelyusingthe Centigramserver

Archive messagesonto their local PC

Keep in touch anywhere with remote modem access--and message download
capability

0 Use OLE to exchangeCentigram voice and fax messageswith other Windows
applications
7.1 Easier and Faster Messaging
OneViewusesa personalinbox to displayall of a mailbox owner’s voice andfax messages.At
one glancea user can seeeachmessagein the mailbox, including information on the sender’s
name,the message-type
(e.g., voice or fax), the subjectline of the message,andthe dateandtime
of the message. Moreover, urgent messagesare flagged with an exclamation point and
confidentialmessageswith a lock. From the inbox a user can double-clickon a voice message,
and OneViewwill automaticallyplay the messageeither through a soundcard on the user’s PC
or throughanytelephone.
-

In additionto playing voice messagesand viewing faxes, &review provides a number of easy
point-and-clickfunctions to help usersmanagetheir voice and fax messages.Users can Make,
Give, and Answer messagesdirectly from OneView. With a few simple commandsusers can
recorda voice message,addressit anotheruser,attach a fax, and sendthe compoundmessageto
the recipient.
To help the user addressand send messages,OneView utilizes addressbooks and distribution
lists. When addressinga message,the usercan selecta recipientfrom any of theseaddressbooks
or distribution lists. The distribution lists are the same system and personaldistribution lists
availableto the userthrough the touch-tonetelephoneinterface. OneView accessestwo types of
addressbooks: a systemaddressbook and a personaladdressbook. The system addressbook
has the namesand mailbox numbersof everyonewith a mailbox on the local Series6 system.

Page
22

The personal address book is where users keep a personalized list of names, phone numbers and
fax numbers of colleagues, suppliers and customers.

7.2 FaxMemo and OneView
In addition to viewing fax messages from their PC, OneView improves a user’s ability to create
and send of faxes. Users can create a fax message from any Windows application and send it to
any mailbox on the Series 6 or to any fax machine in the world. OneView eliminates the need for
having a fax board in every PC and an analog DID phone line in every office. Users can share
the server fax resources on the Series 6.

7.3 Saving Messages
OneView allows users to drag-and-drop messages from the inbox into messaie folders, where
they are saved on the local hard drive or on a network file server. In addition, users can convert a
voice message into a standard Windows .WAV file or convert a fax into a standard .TIF file andsave it in a local Windows folder. Once in these standard formats, users can embed these
messagesinto any OLE-enabled document (e.g., MS Word, cc:Mail) using the OLE interface.

7.4 OneView Remote
OneView Remote is a new product the allows subscribers to access their messages from their PC
using a telephone line and modem. Remote users can call into the Centigrti system from any
location and have full OneView access to their mailbox. OneView provides two modes of
operation for remote users, online and offline. In the online mode, users can directly accesstheir
mailbox functions, as they would from a local PC connected to the Centigram system. In the
offline mode, users can download the contents of their messages to their local PC and then log
off. Their mailbox information is now stored on the local PC and they can manage their
messages (e.g., listen to, respond to, delete, keep, make, etc.) offline, at a time and location
convenient to them. After completing their messaging activities, subscribers then reconnect to
- the Centigram system and resynchronize their mailbox.

Page 23

Section 8: Application Mailboxes
Numerous, tailor-made advanced applications can be designed on Centigram’s Series 6 system
simply by using FCOS. These are known as application mailboxes. Nine different application
mailboxes are described below.

8.1

Greeting Only

Greeting Only mailboxes are used to provide information to a caller, but do not allow the caller
to leave a message. There are three types of greeting only mailboxes:

Voice greeting

Faxgreeting

Voice and fax greeting

Voice greeting only mailboxes greet all callers with specific voice information (such as weather
information or traffic reports). Fax greeting only mailboxes are used by callers to receive faxes
on demand. Callers who dial from a phone connected to a fax machine automatically receive a
particular fax document, such as the company’s annual report.
Voice and fax greeting only mailboxes allow a caller to hear a voice message and retrieve a fax
with one telephone call. The voice message can describe the contents to help the caller decide
whether to retrieve the fax.

8.2

Tree

Tree mailboxes route calls to pre-selected mailboxes when callers enter a single digit. The
single-digit options are announced in the greeting. For example, a company’s human resources
information number might play a tree mailbox greeting such as “Thank you for calling Company
XYZ’s human resources information number. Press 1 for benefits information, 2 for job listings,
3 for job applications...”
Tree mailboxes can also be configured to handle rotary dialers. An FCOS bit will automatically
route rotary callers to the first or last mailbox in the tree, or transfer them to the operator.

8.3

Chain

Chain mailboxes allow a caller to enter a mailbox number and be transferred to that mailbox
upon hearing the greeting. If the caller does not know the number of the party they wish to
reach, they can also dial the name of the mailbox or mailbox owner.

Page 24

8.4

Rotational

Rotational mailboxes allow an administrator to create audiotext applications where callers have
one of a number of greetings that constantly change. Greetings change either by time and date
(in a period-type rotational mailbox) or with every call (in an index-type rotational mailbox).
Rotational mailboxes can be programmed as “greeting only,” meaning that after a caller hears a
greeting, the phone hangs up. They also can be programmed to allow the caller to leave a
message after the greeting.
A movie theater can use period-type rotational mailboxes to inform callers of daily movie
features. Callers on Monday hear the regular greeting, the day of the week, the feature film, and
the show times for that film. Callers on Tuesday hear the regular greeting and the relevant
r.
information for Tuesday’s showing, and so on.
Index-type rotational mailboxes are programmed to automatically change the greeting on a
per-call basis. For example, retail store might have ten different sales going on at a particular
time. Instead of greeting each caller to the store with information about all ten, the system gives
the first caller the first sale message, the second caller the second sale message, the third caller
the third message, and so on. If the first caller calls the store a second time, they (will likely)
hear a different sale message. Rotational, tree and chain mailboxes can be combined or used
independently.

8.5

Broadcast

Broadcast mailboxes allow both system users and outside callers to record and send a single
message to multiple users. To illustrate the use of a broadcast mailbox, imagine that the manager
of a company health club wants club members to know about an upcoming tournament. Instead
of leaving messages for every member separately, the manager can log into their mailbox and
make a message for the broadcast mailbox. The broadcast mailbox, in turn, sends the message to
all of the members’ mailboxes.
A broadcast mailbox’s distribution list (the club members in the example above) is completely
configurable by the system administrator or the end user. Each distribution list can contain up to
65,535 members.
Broadcast mailboxes can be used to send out voice messages, fax messages, or combined voice
and fax messages.

Page 25

8.6

MESA-Forms

MESA-Forms is a voice forms application that gives outside callers the ability to leave messages
in a way that simulates written information on paper forms. Applications include order entry,
questionnaires, routine requests for information, or an overflow for a busy ACD group. Callers
accessing a MESA-Forms application will automatically be moved through a series of
pre-recorded questions. The system waits for the caller to record their answer before moving on
to the next question. System users who transcribe the responses can log into a single mailbox
and hear an uninterrupted sequence of replies.
One example of a MESA-Forms application is a golf course that wishes to schedule tee times.
Callers can call into a designated mailbox extension and leave their name, phone number, date
and time they wish to play golf, and number of persons in their party. Callers can also have the
option of transferring to an attendant in lieu of leaving the requested information, or of
e
transferring to an attendant after leaving the information.

8.7

Shared Extension

This application is commonly used in universities and colleges. One system can be subdivided
so that one telephone number accessesmore than one individual. When a caller reaches a shared
extension, they could hear, “You have reached the American University. To leave a message for
Diana Thompson, please press 1. To leave a message for Jim Smith, press 2. To leave a
message for George Johnson, press 3.” The general greeting can easily be changed and the
system can also be configured so that an outside caller does not hear a general greeting.

8.8

Guaranteed Fax

A guaranteed fax mailbox allows the system administrator to create a “never-busy” fax machine
application. If a fax machine is busy, faxes are forwarded to a “guaranteed fax” mailbox that
receives and stores them, without the caller knowing it. Once received, the ,-anteed
fax
mailbox will attempt to deliver the stored fax to the fax machine until it gets through.

8.9

Walkaway Fax

Walkaway fax allows callers to dial one telephone number and immediately send a fax, without a
voice coversheet, directly into a user’s mailbox. The walkaway fax mailbox simultaneously
listens for fax tone and plays the user’s personal greeting. If CNG tone is detected, the mailbox
receives the incoming fax. If none is detected, the mailbox prepares to receive a voice message.
Walkaway fax mailboxes can be configured to play the user’s normal greeting upon answering or
a brief, instructional prompt, followed by the user’s greeting. The former is often used for
mailboxes that receive both voice and fax messages and fax messages with voice coversheets. In

Page26

this situation, the caller reaches the walkaway fax mailbox and hears the user’s greeting. The
caller can leave a voice message, leave a voice message and append a fax by pressing the Start
button on the fax machine, or just send a fax at any time by pressing the Start button on the fax
machine.
The abbreviated prompt, which instructs the caller to press 1 to leave a voice message or Start to
leave a fax, can be used when the mailbox receives predominantly fax messages. If the caller
doesn’t take action, they will hear the user’s personal greeting. Both options can be used in
providing one number voice/fax mailboxes to mailbox owners.

Page27

Section 9: System Administration
The system administrator is responsible for creating and maintaining all mailboxes on the
system. The Series 6 system allows an administrator to perform the following tasks:

Use Functionally Partitioned System Administration
security and establish unique accessprivileges

Create, modify and delete mailboxes

Perform routine maintenance of the software files

Change the system time and date, when required

Bill clients

Run system reports

(FPSA) to enhance system

..
Set up systemwide distribution lists and broadcast mailboxes

Build FCOS, LCOS, GCOS, RCOS, TCOS, NCOS

Create messages of the day

Change phone line exceptions

Configure optional features, such as CallAgent

Use Alarm Reporting Monitor (ARM)
administrators of possible system errors

to proactively not@

technicians and

The VoiceMemo application comes pre-installed in the Series 6 system with default values.
These values can easily be changed through the Series 6 console. The system issues prompts to
guide the system administrator. To receive help online, the system administrator can type “?” in
response to any prompt.
-

All ports on the Series 6 system are assigned to line groups. Each line group, in turn, is assigned
to a single application, and any programming done for that application applies to every port in
the line group. The number of ports in each line group is configurable to adjust for the amount of
phone traffic for each particular application.

9.1

Functionally

Partitioned

System Administration

(FPSA)

FPSA adds a much higher level of security to system administrators. FPSA allows an
administrator to limit access to operations, administration and maintenance (OA&M) functions
on a departmental or individual basis. In addition, with FPSA, customers may offload or resell
certain administrative functions to restricted groups within their organizations or within their
customer base.
Page28

FPSA adds security in five ways. First, it can only be activated or deactivated by a special
diskette, which will be shipped upon request. The person who loads the diskette (system
superuser) is the one person who has accessto the entire system. This person assigns passcodes,
user IDS, and access privileges. There is no way to bypass the super-userpasscode or to
activate/deactivate FPSA without this diskette.
Second, access to any part of the system (administration menus or QNX) is controlled by
passwords and user IDS. If a password is not correct or does not match a user ID, the user cannot
access that part of the system. Passwords only work for the assigned access privileges: if a user
gets into billing and reporting, but doesn’t have access to configuration, that person cannot
change FCOS, the dialing plan, or other functions within the configuration menu. This means
that only people who are trained to perform certain functions on the system can use those
functions.
r.
Third, customers can control who has access to batch commands. These are very powerful
command strings available at the operating system level. Now batch commands can be made
accessible only to those who are trained to use them.
Fourth, super-userscan force system administrators to change their passcodes every configurable
number of days. This lessens the chance that hackers or outsiders will be able to enter the system
and do damage. If an administrator/technician does not change their passcode by the specified
date, they will be denied accessto all parts of the system.
Fifth, FPSA provides an audit trail (if the audit trail is turned on) every time an administrator
enters the system. The trail indicates user ID, name, when the system was entered, which menu
was entered, and what action was taken (e.g., created 200 mailboxes, changed billing rates, ran
verify). Thus, all actions performed on the system can be traced back to a specific individual.

9.2

Billing and Reporting

The Series 6 system offers four categories of reports that provide comprehensive and detailed
- information for the system administrator. These reports are very useful in performing billing,
diagnostic and usage functions. The four reporting categories are:
1. Statistics-five

reports that cover how system resourcesare used.

2. Billing-four
reports that give a breakdown of charges for individual mailboxes, and
calculate the total amount due.
3. System information -ten reports that give specific information about how the system
is configured or programmed.
4. CDR-an optional report that tracks in detail every voice or fax call made or received
by the Series 6 system.

Page 29

Statistics reports offer the administrator information on usage of line ports, speech storage,
trunks, MESA-Net, and messages.
Billing reports give information on the breakdown of charges for individual mailboxes by
statistic, then calculate the total amount that is due. The four reports cover current and past
billing statistics and statistics on terminated mailboxes.
The system information reports provide details on system configuration, classes of service,
system errors, phone line exceptions and pager system access codes.
Call Detail Recorder (CDR) provides a comprehensive amount of detail on all calls made to or
from the Series 6 system. With CDR, information such as when a call was made, how long it
lasted, whether it included a fax and, if so, how many pages, is available. CDR also records
information on fax messages, voice messages, and pager notifications to ‘telephone numbers
anywhere in the world. CDR is in standard ASCII text and can be exported to an off-board
program for further editing and formatting.
In addition to the above reports, Outdial Billing to Calling Card allows mailbox owners to be
billed automatically for outcalls made from the Series 6 system. Both service providers and CPE
customers have been asking for an easier, more reliable way to bill back for long distance and
toll calls made from the Series 6 system. Long distance and toll “outcalls” made from the
Series 6 system include off-system messaging, call placement, auto wakeup, fax retrieval and
paging.
With outdial billing to a calling card, all long distance and toll calls are charged to the mailbox
owner’s calling card at the time of the call. Long distance and toll calls are defined by a new
limits class of service (LCOS), which specifies a minimum billed outcall number length.
Outcalls greater than or equal to this length are billed to the mailbox owner’s calling card.

9.3
-

Administration

by Telephone

Many of the system administration activities can be done over the telephone. This is quite useful
when the administrator is away from the console or is located at some distance from the
administrator’s work station. Functions that can be performed by phone include:
l

Creating, deleting and modifying mailboxes

Changing mailbox passcodes

Changing the system clock

Getting usage statistics

Page 30

A number of security features have been added to the Series 6 system to prevent break-in and
manipulation from the administrator’s mailbox. For example, the system only allows five
seconds of response time for each prompt before it announces “no change” and returns to the
administration menu.

9.4

System Backup and Restore

Frequent data backups are a very important precaution against inadvertent loss or destruction of
data or system information files. The Series 6 system backups are easy because they can be
performed while the system is processing calls.
Data can be restored from floppy backups selectively or in its entirety.
information is restored except speech (e.g., messages and greetings).

9.5

In the process, all
t

Message Purge

Both voice and fax messages can be purged automatically based on message age. The Series 6
system allows administrators to define different purge limits for each of the following types of
messages:

Unplayed voice messages

Unplayed fax messages

Saved voice messages

Saved fax messages

Urgent voice messages

Urgent fax messages

Voice message receipts

Fax message receipts

Paging receipts

These message retention limits may be configured systemwide or on an individua .l mailbox basis
for maximum flexibility.

9.6

Telnet Access

System administrators may login to the Series 6 sener through multiple methods. First, they
may iogin through the console using a serial port connection. Alternatively, they may dial up
remotely using a modem into a serial port. Finally, administrators of the Series 6 system may
administer the system through Telnet access over a TCP/IP network. The latter provides for
faster throughput and use of existing local area networks.

Page 3 1

Section 10: Security
Centigram has consistently led the industry in providing system security features at the system
level and the mailbox level. The Series 6 platform offers a high degree of protection for system
management, administration and maintenance, mailbox usage, and access to network facilities,
applications and information.
At the record level, all information and database records, regardless of format, are stored on the
Series 6 platform in a proprietary Adaptive Digital Pulse Code Modulation (ADPCM) algorithm
developed by Centigram. Hard disks are formatted by the factory to accept information through
this proprietary encryption method. Additional security is provided for the database through a
proprietary file and record format.
At the mailbox level, the first level of security is protection through passcodes. The Series 6
system. can be configured to require passcodes on all mailboxes. Moreover, users can be required
to have minimum passcodes of up to 10 digits, and this can be- changed by the system
administrator at any time to a number between 4 and 10. No trivial passcodes (simple series,
same as mailbox number, or all same number) are allowed. If the wrong passcode is input when
someone is trying to get into a mailbox, the cal!er must put the correct passcode in twice or the
system will hang up. Hackers will not know if the second attempt was correct; callers are not
prompted for the correct number of passcode digits nor are they told what was the incorrect
entry.
If a high number of incorrect passcodes have been attempted, the system will notify the user at
the next login. The system also can be configured to lock a mailbox after a configurable number
of incorrect passcodes have been entered. Only the system administrator can unlock the mailbox,
set a new temporary passcode, reset the tutorial, and require reinitialization from the integrated
telephone number.

Various access limits can be applied to the Series 6 system through the Limits Class of Service
(LCOS) to control outcalling capabilities from the mailboxes themselves. Limits can be placed
on the number of digits that may be dialed from a mailbox (4 for in-house extensions, 7 for local
calls and 10 for paging calls to an 800 number). Limits also can be placed on an individual
mailbox session length, causing the system to hang up when the limit is reached. This session
limit can be lowered if a system has been threatened by hackers.
Using RCOS, limits can be placed on the actual digits that are dialed (NPA/NXX screening)
from a particular mailbox. Screening can take place at both the toll (central office) and area code
(long distance) level. In addition, limits can be placed on the interaction between mailboxes
through the Group Class of Service (GCOS). The GCOS of a particular mailbox determines if it
may interact with any other mailbox on the system. For example, the GCOS could prohibit a
messaging mailbox from accessing an audiotext one, or a mailbox on the system from accessing
through MESA-Net a remote mailbox on the same system.

Page 32

Enhanced security is available for all system administration functions on the Series 6 console
through Functionally Partitioned System Administration (FPSA). FPSA allows an administrator
to create different access privileges, user IDS and passwords for each administrator on the
system. Moreover, FPSA provides an audit trail of all system activity and the respective
administrator. For more information on FPSA, see section 9.1.

10.1 Disaster Recovery
Centigram offers multiple disaster recovery solutions. First, Centigram maintains at all times a
stock of ready-to-ship systems in the event of a natural disaster or a major system failure.
Second, Centigram maintains a parts depot on both the West and East coasts. Finally, using
MESA-Net, a backup system can be configured in a different location that mirrors in every way
the primary system. Reprogrammin g the switch allows mailbox owners to use the same pilot
number to reach their mailboxes, enter their existing passwords, and hear their current name
speech and greetings, without ever knowing that they have been moved to the remote system.
This function is derived from the Series 6 system’s ability to broadcast messages, greetings,
name speech and passcodes to one or more remote systems.

Page 33

Section 11: Networking
11.1

MESA-Net

MESA-Net provides the critical messaging tool that links the members of your team to your
company and to your strategic partners. It links multiple Centigram Series 6 voice and fax
servers into one, high-speed global messaging network. MESA-Net bridges geographic
distances and time zone differences by allowing you to send messages to and receive responses
back from your field sales organization, your sister divisions, your suppliers and your customers
at any hour, day or night. You can send voice and fax messages to anyone or any group on the
network from any phone or OneView-enabled PC. MESA-Net over TCP/IP is a new product
available on the Series 6. Centigram’s MESA-Net Async product is also available in Series 6, as
well as for Centigram systems running software release 5.0X.
e
Capacity to Spare
Voice messaging systems have been effectively utilized to facilitate communications between
people located within single buildings or campuses. MESA-Net extends your communications
reach by networking multiple Series 6 servers into a single messaging community. Centigram
sets a new high water mark for global messaging capacity. With Series 6 and MESA-Net you
can provide voice and fax messaging to a large metropolitan area, a multinational Fortune 100
company, or even a small country. MESA-Net supports links up to 1,500 Series 6 servers,
supporting millions of users.
High-Fidelity

Messaging

MESA-Net’s digital networking delivers high fidelity voice messaging even over noisy
transmission lines. All messagesare digitally encoded and files transferred from server to server
with automatic error detection.
There is no accumulative distortion from multiple
transmissions.*
s

MESA-Net TCP/IP, which is available in all Series 6 and above platforms, provides high-speed
message transfer between servers over standard Ethernet. Net throughput varies depending on
the Series 6 model and other network traf3ic.
Internet Compatible
With the Series 6, MESA-Net can take advantage of your existing corporate network to transport
messages from server to server using TCP/IP. This means MESA-Net TCPiIP is fully
compatible with the Internet. You can use the Internet or private intemet service providers, such
as AT&T and MCI, to connect your servers together.

In the initial release 6.OA the rate of transmission is only 18.5 Kbps

Page 34

For small, very affordable configurations that have occasional network messaging, MESA-Net
supports low-cost, dial-up modems. Depending on your messaging traffic, you can design your
network to use analog lines, ISDN, 56 kbps lease lines, or El/T1 lines.
Interoperate with Third Party Voice Mail
Communicating with suppliers and customers is critical to any business. You can set up your
Centigram Series 6 server to use AMIS Analog to send and receive voice messages from nearly
all third-party voice mail platforms. In addition, to reduce toll call charges, you can use
MESA-Net to forward your messagesto the nearest Centigram system, then use AMIS to deliver
it to the third-party voice mail platform.
Scaleable Servers
Centigram Series 6 servers are scaleable. You can start with a module system,supporting up to
60 ports (2 El/T1 connections), expand it to a 4-module system, and then network multiple
systems together using MESA-Net to support up to 360,000 ports. Depending on the level of
network message traffic and the number of servers supported, you can use a 10 Mbps Ethernet
LAN to deliver up to 20,000 network voice messages per day (assuming 30 seconds/message,
18.3 kbps speech encoding).
Minimize Networking Costs
In some cases, Centigram Series 6 servers will be connected via dialup lines (e.g., POTS,
switched 56, or ISDN). To effectively minimize the cost of network charges, each Series 6
system can be configured to accumulate messages in a queue until a certain threshold is
exceeded, and then send all the accumulated messages at once across the network to their final
destination. Different types of thresholds include: number of messages in queue, cumulative
number of minutes messages have waited, total length of messages waiting, or time of day.
System managers can set each of these thresholds to optimize the balance between cost and
delivery delays.
There also are separate queues for normal and urgent delivery messages. The administrator can
set lower thresholds for urgent messages, allowing them to get delivered faster. The sender has
the option of marking their messageurgent or normal. Records are kept on all network messages
so appropriate billing or cost allocations can be performed.
Upgrading Basic MESA-Net Networks
Series 6 systems can support both MESA-Net TCP/IP and Async MESA-Net. The Ethernet card
and the serial (RS232) card must be installed in separate modules. Network message throughput
between high-traffic locations can be improved by replacing existing Async MESA-Net
networks with a TCP/IP network. Series 6 servers must maintain a hybrid MESA-Net TCP/IP
and basic network configuration until every node has been upgraded to TCP/IP.

Page35

MESA-Net Specifications
Series 6 servers support one Ethernet 1OBaseT interface and up to 32 WS-232 asynchronous
ports. MESA-Net TCP/IP is intended for use with existing corporate wide area networks
(WANs) or for connecting several collocated Series 6 severs together.

General MESA-Net

Specifications

- MESA-Net TCP/‘IP
- Both MESA-Net Async and TCP/IP (requires

MESA-Net TCP/IP Specifications

ork connect Series 6 via

Page 36

MESA-Net Async Specifications
Approximate max. number network
messages per node
Interface options
Transmission speeds

MESA-Net Async Parallel Links

300 messagesper hour (assuming: 30
seconds/message
- 16 links of RS-232 per module
- Maximum 57.6 kbps per link via RS-232 port
- 28.8 kbps, full duplex via V.34 modem
connection
8 parallel links (max throughput depends on
Series 6 model1

11.2 AMIS
AMIS Analog is a Series 6 system networking application that allows Series 6 systems to
communicate with other vendors’ voice mail systems. With this optional feature installed,
mailbox owners can send messages, receive messages, and answer messages received from
remote systems.
Any mailbox owner who has AMIS Analog can make and give messages from the local system
to any other systems equipped with AMIS Analog capabilities. Any message that cannot be
delivered will be returned to the message maker with a reason for nondelivery. When a message
is received from another system, the mailbox owner may answer that message with a single
keystroke.
Centigram offers AMIS Analog to send and receive voice messages from &arly all third-party
voice mail servers. You can transfer your message via MESA-Net over your low-cost network to
a nearby Centigram system and then deliver it to the recipient’s voice server over AMIS.
Centigram has enhanced AMIS Analog in Series 6 to provide the same universal dialing plan
capabilities provided by MESA-Net.

Page37

..
Section 12: Switch Integrations
Switch integrations establish a connection between a telephone switch and the Series 6 system.
This connection provides call information for direct or forwarded calls and message waiting
signals for the user, and is transparent to both callers and users. When the telephone switch and
the Series 6 system are integrated, the two systems interact to give capabilities that neither
system could provide alone. For example, an outside caller is automatically forwarded to the
personal greeting of the called party, instead of reaching the main greeting and having to re-enter
the party’s extension. In addition, a caller can return to an operator after reaching voice mail,
without having to hang up and redial.
The Series 6 system uses three different methods to integrate with a customer’s private branch
exchange (PBX) or central office: call in-band DTMF, direct data link, and electronic set
emulation. The Series 6 platform also supports two additional integrations with telephone
switching networks: R2 and SS7.

12.1 PBX Integrations
l

Call In-band DTMF and MF- where the switching system and the Series 6 system
communicate with one another using an exchange of tones in the voice frequency
band (inband).
Direct Data Link-where the switching system and the Series 6 system communicate
with one another using a special data communications circuit, separatefrom the voice
channel.
Electronic Set Emulation-where the Series 6 system acts as an electronic telephone
within the switching system. The Series 6 system extracts and presents call-related
information as if it were a station.

12.2 R2 Integration
Through its R2 integration module, the Series 6 platform provides the interface link between
telephone networks and the Series 6 system. The R2 module converts R2 Channel Associated
Signaling on 30-channel PCM (El) trunks (CCITT Rec. G.704) to the Series 6 platform’s
gromietary analog signaling. It also converts the Series 6 system’s analog signals back to the R2
protocol digital signaling for the telephone networks. It demultiplexes and decodes incoming
PCM voice lines and encodes, multiplexes, and frames outgoing messages from the Series 6
system into the El format. Centigram’s R2 integration module conforms to CCITT Q.400,
Q-421,4.440, and 4.441, Fascicle VI.4, supplement no. 7.

Page 38

12.3

SS7 Integration

Through its SS7 integration, the Series6 platform also supportsthe SS7 out-of-bandcommon
channelingprotocol for data and voice communicationsbetweenISDN switches over TlEl
lines. The SS7 integration terminates the voice channelson 30-channelPCM (El) trunks
(CCITT Rec. G.704). In addition, the SS7 integration provides out-of-band call setup and
teardown information to the Series6 platform. The Series6 systemprovidesnative on-board
SS7digital support. Centigram’s SS7integrationconformsto CCITT 4.767, FascicleVI.9 and
ANSI ISUP standards.

Page 39

Section 13: Architecture
The Series 6 platform is a modular, open, standards-based communications server that allows
users to make, send, receive, and answer voice, fax, and e-mail messages from a single mailbox,
24 hours a day, by using a touch-tone telephone or a PC. In addition, users can access any
information service-in any format (voice, text, image )--from the same mailbox. The system
requires no special environmental conditions, and is compatible with virtually every PBX and
switching system. The Series 6 platform can accommodate from 50 to thousands of users
economically because of our modular expandable system architecture (MESA) design strategy.

13.1 The MESA Design Strategy
Many voice processing companies have product lines with different model’s designed to serve
specific capacity points. Each system in the product line has to be completely replaced whenever
a customer outgrows it. At Centigram, we believe that the investments our customers make in
our products are worth keeping. A basic principle of our MESA design is that our systems can
be expanded in the field.
Series 6 systems do not have fixed port/storage configurations. New applications, new
information formats, new storage and new ports can be added independently. Service bureaus,
whose subscribers are charged for the amount of time that messages are stored on the disk,
require a greater ratio of ports to storage hours. Corporate customers, whose employees tend to
keep messages, typically want more storage. Centigram’s MESA design allows our customers to
buy only what is needed. All this flexibility is without penalty, since each growth point is
designed to be cost-effective when compared to competitors’ models that specialize at that
system size.
Modular expansion is only one aspect of MESA design. Simplicity, the ability to incorporate the
latest technology, and distributed processing are integral parts of the Series 6 platform design-a
design that allows us to build the best systems for today and for the future.
a Keep ii simple
The platform is one of the most reliable communications servers in the industry because it is
engineered to be very simple, with redundancy options that ensure unequaled performance and
uptime. Each module has only four basic components: the line cards, the CPU, the hard disk
drive, and the power supply. Our architecture allows us to have Mean Time Between Failures
(MTBFs) well in excess of five years.
Use available technology whenever possible
Series 6 systems are built with commercially available, industry-standard components. We can
choose the most reliable hard disk drives, power supplies, and chip sets on the market. Our SCSI

Page40

hard disk drives, for example, have a minimum of 150,000 hours rated MTBF; field performance
is far higher.
The Series 6 system’s design uses an Industry Standard Architecture (ISA) backplane bus, a
Multi-Vendor Integration Protocol (MVIP) circuit switching bus, and either an Integrated Drive
Electronics (IDE) or a Small Computer Systems Interface (SCSI) drive hardware interface.
These cormnon protocols allow our system to accept new technology as it is developed. We have
been able to add digital networking, interprocessor communications, and important new software
features to the Series 6 platform by taking advantage of the wide range of ISA-compatible cards
that can be plugged into our backplane. Improvements in industry standard chips have enabled
us to reduce the number of chips needed to perform the same functions, which controls costs and
increases reliability. The recent introduction of large-capacity hard disk drives that meet our
stringent reliability standards allows us to offer upgrades that double the storage capacity of our
systems.
The main processor for each module is either an Intel 80486 or Pentium 100 MHz processor.
When necessary, we can upgrade to a more powerful processor within the same family,
Improvements in industry-standard chips also make it possible to incorporate Very Large Scale
Integration (VLSI) solutions into the Series 6 architecture. Use of the latest technology and
fewer chips reduce power needs and generate less heat than individual components, which
increases system reliability.
The Series 6 platform uses the QNX operating system from Quantum Software. QNX Software
is a driving member of the Portable Operating System IX (POSIX) committee, which sets the
standards for hardware-independent operating systems. The QNX software is a 32-bit operating
system.
Focus our resources where we offer a unique advantage: in sojiktare and architecture
Using industry standard components and technology allows us to focus our development efforts
on our unique architecture and software design, leaving component and operating system
engineering to the companies that specialize in these areas.
- Centigram has many of the most feature-rich applications on the market today, because our
standard software package provides millions of distinct classes of service and contains features
that allow applications to go far beyond simple voice messaging. Also, our high density analog
line cards and digital connections enable us to add direct DID trunks, TX1 circuits, low-power
cptions and a multifrequency (MF) signaling option on the line cards. MF allows us to interface
with cellular telephone networks.

Page 41

Dktributed Processing
The Series 6 system’s MESA architecture emphasizes distributed processing for the fastest
throughput and most efficient use of system resources. Processing occurs at four levels:
1. Module level
2. Irma-module communication
3. Line card level
4. Disk drive interface
a

At the module level, the main processor controls multiple port configurations. The
module processor controls trafYic and tracks resource allocati?ns for all internal
processing interactions. MESA-Link, an internal LAN, integrates 4 Model 640
modules together at the CPU control level. MESA-Link enables all modules to
operate as a single system through high-level information exchange and inter-process
communication (IPC).
Within a module, the MVIP bus switches calls between cards. This MVIP bus adheres
to the computer telephony integration (CTI) standard. The MVIP bus connects any
digital telephony interfaces (such as Tl/El lines) to the DSP cards, where voice
processing occurs. Service cards (such as fax cards) can be assigned to a dedicated
port or shared among a group of ports, either analog or digital.
Many processing tasks are concentrated in the line cards. Each analog or Digital line
card contains its own 386 processor and multiple digital signaling processors (DSPs).
The line cards provide: signal processing (speech compression and decompression),
DTMF detection, pause compression, and MF tone detection.
In the Model 640 system, the Monitor Control Board II manages multiple SCSI
interfaces. Each SCSI interface has its own dedicated controller, which manages all
disk functions and error checking for each hard disk. The Model 120s can contain up
to four SCSI disk drives which are controlled by a plug-in SCSI card. IDE drivers
control hard disks in the Model 70 and Model 1201configurations.

Centigram’s implementation of distributed processing is unique in the industry. Multiple
modules in the Model 640 system are linked together with multiple SCSI buses and the
MESA-Link, an internal LAN. The SCSI disks are reliably managed as a single database. Each
module processes its own work while having fast, direct access to the common database.
Database integrity is maintained by a fault tolerant distributed file system.
A Call Scenario:
When an outside caller dials the Series 6 VoiceMemo message center number, the call rings on a
line card port. The line card detects the ringing signal, and relays the event to the module CPU.

Page 42

The CPU locates the system greeting on the hard disk and transfers the data from the hard disk
to buffers on the line card. This buffer is divided into three rotating buffers that fill and empty in
sequence, ensuring that the user never hears a pause in the playback of the greeting.
The caller enters the mailbox number in response to the system greeting. The line card
recognizes the DTMF input and sends it to the CPU. The CPU interprets the DTMF tones as a
mailbox number and locates the personal mailbox greeting on the hard drive. The mailbox
greeting is transferred from the hard drive to the line card, where it is played to the user.
When the caller responds to the prompt to record a message for the mailbox, the module
allocates space on the hard disk drive to store the message, sets up data transfer between the line
card and the hard disk drive, and drops out. The speech is first digitally sampled by the linecard.
The line card then compresses this speech and sends it to hard disk drive for storage. This
compression can be set for 18.3 kbps, 24 kbps or 32 kbps sampling rates.
4
When the recipient plays the message, the line card converts the 18.3 kbps, 24 kbps or 32 kbps
compressed speech data back into 64 Kbits by a reverse algorithm. The-result is expanded to an
analog signal, which is sent out the line card port to the recipient’s telephone, and the recipient
hears the message.

13.2 Functional

Overview

13.2.1 The Series 6 Module
The Series 6 system is modular. In the Model 640, a maximum of four modules can be
connected to reach the capacity of a Series 6 system. Thus, when a customer outgrows their
existing module, they can just add an additional module to it, instead of having to buy a
completely new system. Each Series 6 module consists of the following 9 components: (See
Exhibit 13-3 for an architectural diagram of a 4-module Model 640 system).
l

Central Processing Unit

Modular Controller Board

Backplane

MYIP Bus

Power Supply

Hard Disk

Floppy Disk Drive

Telephony interface card

QNX Operating System
Page 43

Centrat Processing Unit (CPV)
The CPU subsystem consists of an80486- or Pentium-based central processor board, with 16-64
MB of RAM. The board plugs into the ISA backplane. In the Model 70 system, the CPU is on
the motherboard. Line cards, service cards, and communications cards also plug into the ISA
backplane, which provides the interface with the CPU. There are 13 ISA-compatible available
slots for each Model 640 module, 11 available slots in the Model 1201, 10 available slots in the
Model 12OS, and 7 slots available in the Model 70.
The backplane accepts many
ISA-compatible cards, such as fax cards, line cards, DSP cards, communications cards, and
T l/E 1 interface cards.
The Model 70 and Model 1201 configurations support the PC/AT IDE interface, while the
120s and Model 640 systems support the SCSI interface. A plug-in SCSI adapter card is used as
the disk interface in the Model 120s. All CPU subsystems support the 1.44-MB floppy
interface. The CPU subsystem includes two serial ports for maintenance purposes. Optionally, a
second plug-in card will handle several high-speed RS-232 lines for integration with PBXs and
other peripheral device needs.
In addition, the Model 640 system uses the Module Control Board II to manage I/O resources.
MCB II components include:
0

4 Small Computer System Interface (SCSI) bus interface controllers.

External alarm interface

Audible alarm system

Four asynchronous RS-232 ports

0 NW&M
0
I

Voltage, temperature, and fan rotation monitors

Backplane
Line cards plug into the backplane, which provides the interface between the line cards and the
CPU board. There are 13 slots for cards in each Model 640 module, 12 slots for cards in the
Model 1201 and Model 120s systems and 7 slots in the Model 70. The backplane is
ISA-compatible, and accepts many ISA-compatible cards, such as the CPUs, line cards, fax
cards, Ethernet cards and the serial cards used for RS-232 type integrations and networking.
M-FTP Bus
The Multi-Vendor Integration Protocol, (MVIP) CTI standard, bus allows telephony board
products from different vendors to operator together. The Series 6 platform supports such boards
as shared resource fax cards, SS7 Protocol cards and DSP cards.

Page 44

Power Supply Subsystem

The Model 640 has separatepower suppliesfor the CPU anddisk storagesubsystems.Thereare
two optionsfor both:
l

A 50- to 60-Hz, 1lo-240 VAC input 500W (nominal), auto-selectable,quadrupleoutput (+5, +12, -12, and-48 VDC) switchingpower supplyplus a 150Wdisk storage
modulepower supply.
A -48 VDC input, 500W (nominal), quadruple-outputswitching power supply (+5,
+12, -12, -48 VDC) switchingpower supplyplus a 150Wdisk storagemodulepower
supply.

The Model 1201and Model 120s configurationsprovide the following single power supply
options:
l

A 50- to 60-l&, 1OO-120VAC, 500W

A 50- to 60-l&, 200-240VAC, 500W

TheModel 70 configurationprovidesthe following singlepower supplyoptions:
l

A 50- to 60-Hz, loo-120 VAC, 200W

A 50- to 60-Hz 200-240VAC, 200W

Auxiliav

Equipment Subsystem

The auxiliary equipmentsubsystemcan consist of externaldevicesfor the Model 640 system
such as the CSOLIO module for switching to redundant systems resources, automatic
contact-closuremonitoring devices,proprietaryPBX or standardsignalingintegrations,or serial
interfaces.
Hard Disk
s

Hard disks provide storagefor the operatingsystem, system software, mailbox and message
statistics, and digitized speech. Centigram aims for the highestreliability on hard disks, by
qualifying them through a rigorous burn-in and testing process. Our hard disks must meet a
minimum MTBF of 150,000hours. At leasttwo sourcesare qualifiedfor eachhard disk size.
Floppy Disk Drive

All Series6 systemsare equippedwith a 1.44Mb formatted (2.0 Mb unformatted) floppy disk
drive that uses 3.5” double-sided,double density diskettes. The floppy disk drive is used to
install, reconfigure,and updatesystemsoftware,to back up mailbox and accountdata files, and
to upgradethe storagecapacityof the hard disk.

Page 45

Line Cards
Line cards provide the interface between the Series 6 system and telephone lines from a PBX or
central office trunk. Line interfaces can be either analog or digital trunks. (See Appendix III for
a list of line card interfaces supported by the Series 6 platform). The phone line exceptions
program and the algorithms for digitization and speech compression are stored on the line card.
Line cards monitor all of the telephony events that occur on the network. The line card runs
software that interprets events based on the signal pattern that the line card receives. The event
can be a busy signal, a ring-no-answer, a reorder tone, or a human voice. The program also
allows the line card to detect silence and pauses. The parameters used to interpret these events
are based on North American signaling practices. They may need to be adjusted to comply with
parameters, such as those found in SS7, used in other countries (see Table 4).
Analog
A. Direct Inward Dial /DID): The ability for a caller outside a company to call an internal
extension without having to pass through an operator or attendant. At the Central Office Switch
The Area Code and Prefix are stripped once the number is identified as a DID telephone number
assigned to a company.
B. E&MSignaling: A pair of wires that connect two PBXs or a PBX to a remote extension over
a voice grade line. The “E” lead or EAR, receives an open or ground signal from the far end and
the ‘34” lead or MOUTH, transmits a ground or battery condition to the signaling equipment . A
-48 voltage change on the leads indicates information such as seizure to transmit, recognition of
seizure, release of circuit, dialed digits, etc. Of the 5 types of E&M signaling, Centigram
supports type I and type II.

C. Ground start: A two wire circuit that uses grounding methods to form connections. A
momentary grounding on one side of a two wire trunk , usually on the ring conductor, of the tip
and ring, will establish dialtone. A ground start trunk initiates an outgoing trunk seizure by
applying a maximum of 550 ohms resistance to the tip conductor of the tip and ring. Switching
equipment and telephone circuits must match to operate correctly with each other.
D. LOO-DStart: A two wire circuit that forms a loop when a station goes off-hook to answer a
ring event. The ringing event is trigger by the central office sending AC voltage to the ringer of
a telephone. When the telephone handset is removed from the craddle, a DC loop is formed.
This action bridges a resistance of the tip and ring, both wires, of a telephone line. The central
office recognizes the DC loop and discontinues the ringing event to the set.

Page 46

Digital
-Sianalina:
A digital transmission link standard used by the United States, Canada.,Hong
Kong and Japan. A T-l link has 24 channels that operate at 64Kbps each for a total of 1.544
megabits per second capacity.
E-1 S@=rling: The European Digital transmission link. An E-l has 30 channels for transmitting
voice dam at 64Kbps per channel, plus a 64Kbps for signaling and a 64 Kbps channel for framing
and maintenance. The E-l carries information at a rate of 2.048 megabits per second.
Line Parameters
The VoiceMemo application’s console program provides a menu-driven interface for configuring
line pararneters. Appendix II lists some common phoneline parameters that might need to be
r.
reconfigured for countries other than the United States.
A silence-detection algorithm in the line card software eliminates pauses at the beginning of,
during, and after speech recordings and reduces storage requirements. The algorithm identifies
silence even on a noisy line. If necessary, Automatic Gain Control (AGC) increases the sound
level of the speech when messages are played back.
Different types of line exceptions are described below. For a list of most used line exceptions,
see Appendix II.
Timeout parameters- Line exception timeout parameters help control port usage by
minimizing the amount of time between call processing events. Each of these line
exceptions is set to a value that ensures successful completion of the first event,
without allowing excess time to elapse before the next event begins.
Incoming signal detection -Line card ports use these line exceptions to monitor the
telephony interface and detect incoming signals.
Output signaling adjustments-These line exceptions control the signaling and tones
needed to dial out for pagers, message delivery, and off-system messaging
applications.
DTMF detection-The Series 6 system receives events in the form of DTMF tones.
Some aspects of DTMF detection can be customized for individual line card ports.
Greet command parameters-The greet command, used for call progress and line
signal monitoring, is a general purpose software routine resident on the line card. It
detects speech, recorded announcements, dead lines, and call-progress tones such as
ringback, busy, and reorder. When the Series 6 system application software instructs
a line card port to “wait for a greeting,” the greet command uses digital signal
processors to detect tones and speech.

Page 47

Speechand silencedetection during recording-These parameterswork together to
detectspeechpauses:They stop the systemrecordingwhen a pausehasoccurred and
restart the recordingprocessonce speechhas resumed.This function can be enabled
or disabled.

Serial Ports

The Series6 platform supportsserial ASCII accessfor maintenancevia any of the serial ports.
An outboardmodemis usedfor remotemaintenancefunctionsandis connectedvia a serial port.
The CPU in eachmodel supportstwo serialports. The Model 640 hasfour additionalserial ports
on the MCBII board. The Model 1201,Model 120s andModel 70 needan additionalserial card
to supportmore than two serial connections. Maintenancenormally is performedusing either a
serialVY 100 compatibleterminal or a personalcomputerwith VT-100 terminal emulation. Up
to 16 terminals (4 per module on an Model 640) may be connectedat one time. A terminal is
connectedto serialport one and the outboardmodem can be connectedto bny of the remaining
serialports
The QNX Operating System

Centigram’s ability to grow its platform modularly and distribute processing among its
componentsis due, in large part, to its operatingsystem. The Series6 platform usesthe QNX
operatingsystem. QNX hasa modular designthat can control all systemreal-timefunctions and
applicationswithout the need for outside processors.Operatingsystem functions such as file
handling, network management,device I/O, and other functions, are performed by a series of
accessiblemodulesknown as server tasks. Thesetaskscommunicatewith eachother through a
techniqueknown as messagepassing,where a block of data (the message)is copied from the
data space of one task to that of another. A microkemel provides synchronizationof task
switching and messagepassing.QNX switches betweentasks many times per second,and the
switching is controlledby a processcalled “prioritized eventscheduling,”which ensuresthat the
most important tasksget CPU processingtime when needed.

Page 48

Exhibit 13-l: Module Architecture

ISA BUS

Page 49

13.2.2 Packaging Options
The Series 6 system is available in four different packaging options: the Model 70, Model 1201,
Model 12OS, and the Model 640 system.
Exhibit 13-2 below outlines each system’s
specifications.

Exhibit 13-2: System Specifications

36.75” (93.34 cm)

DOC EN60950
1 IO/220 VAC on1

Parts 15 and 68,
DOC EN60950
1 lo/220 VAC or 48

Page 50

Model 70
The Model 70 PC-style desktop chassis sits conveniently on a surface and is ideal for small
areas. This system consists of:

An Intel 486 DX66 CPU motherboard with 16 MB system memory, 200 watt power
supply and a floppy disk drive.
Up to two hard disks (IDE interface), which stores system software, prompts,
messages, mailbox account, and database information for a maximum of 55 hours of
redundant storage.
Up to 7 full slots are available and a maximum 24 ports can be configured.

The system can be expanded from the basic 10 hours/4 ports by adding pot
ports and storage hours.

or by installing

Exhibit 13-3: Model 70

Expansion

Slots

Offboard

Battery

Power

Supply

Front Fan and
Motherboard
Guides
Motherboard

Front Bezel
Assembly

Bay
(Not Supported)

Bay and Carrier for
Hard Disk and Floppy
Disk Drive
51awoc

Page 5 1

Model 1201

The Model 1201system is housed in an upright floor-standing PC-style tower. It consists of:
l

A 486SX33 Plug-in CPU and a backplane that supports up to 11 available slots, with
a maximum of 32 ports.
Its hard disk interface is IDE and can support up to two hard disks for a maximum
redundant speech storage capacity of 55 hours.
It also includes a floppy disk drive and an internal power supply.

Model 120s
l

The Model 120s consists of a Pentium-100 Plug-in CPU and a backplane that
supports up to 10 available slots, with a maximum of 60 ports. Its hard disk interface
is SCSI and can support up to 4 hard disks for a maximum-redundant speech-storage
capacity of 480 hours.
It also includes a floppy disk drive and an internal power supply.

The system can be expanded by adding ports or by installing both ports and storage.
Exhibit 13-4: Model 120

Rope

Paver

Disk Drive

Supgy
Hard Disk Drive

CPU Card

Line Cards

Badlane

Page 52

‘.

The Model 640 System

Centigram’s MESA design strategy has evolved to include individual assemblies for each
component type. The result is the Model 640 (see Exhibit 13-5). The base Model 640 system
consists of:
l

A storage assembly with one hard disk, one floppy drive

A CPU assembly that includes a backplane and up to 15 card slots

A power supply assembly with a single power supply.

The power supply and storage assemblies have their own cooling systems. All assemblies are
designed for mounting on standard 19” telephony racks.
r.
Individual power leads run from the power supply assembly to the CPU, and to a low voltage
sensor located on the CPU board. A SCSI bus connects the CPU and the hard disks. The floppy
disk drive is connected to the CPU by a separate standard bus.
The Model 640 is the optimal configuration for expansion, since the base system uses only a
small portion of each cabinet.

The disk storage assembly can house up to four hard disks and one floppy disk drive,
giving a maximum storage capacity per module of 1440 hours redundant/2880 hours
non-redundant. Also housed in the disk storage assembly is a 150 watt power supply
which supplies power to all of the drives.
The CPU assembly holds a single CPU board, a backplane, and can support a
maximum of 60 ports per module.
The power supply assembly holds a 500 watt power supply, which provide enough
power to service one full CPU module loaded with the maximum number of cards. It
is capable of monitoring system functions such as fan operations, temperature, and
power source fluctuations.

Page53

Exhibit 13-5: Model 640

Power Supply
Assembly #4

Power Supply
Assembly #I2

Module #2

Module #4

Storage
Assembly #2

Storage
Assembly #f4

storage
Assembly #l

Storage
Assembly #3

Module #l

Power Supply
Assembly #l

Module #I3

!I
i

Power Supply
Assembly #3

x1937vm6

Page 54

.D.I

Multihost Operations

What happens when we take the architecture and expand it across multiple modules? When we
build a large capacity system, or grow a 60-port system to a 240-port system, all modules operate
as a single system with a single database, not a virtual single database created by networking
separate systems together. QNX has built-in peer-to-peer networking, which allows the setup and
control of tasks on any processor across the network. Whether the tasks are executing on the
same processor or on physically remote processors does not matter. Centigram’s MESA
architecture takes advantage of the capability by distributing processing tasks between
microprocessors on the line cards and on the CPU. In addition, on a multimodule system, an
entire bus (the MESA-Link bus) is reserved exclusively for CPU-to-CPU message passing.
The MESA-Link bus acts as a high-speed LAN that transmits all control functions between the
master and slave modules. This maintains central control over the distributed processing
functions in a multimodule system. All communications between disk d&s and line cards,
including database information and speech information, occur over the SCSI bus. The speed of
the MESA-Link bus, carrying limited control information, ensures that multimodule systems
perform as efficiently as a single module system. For fault-tolerant needs, a second MESA-Link
bus is added to ensure that CPU to CPU cormnunication is uninterrupted.
Ports on a multimodule Model 640 system have equal access to system resources, no matter
where they are located. Running on the main module processor is a program called “Master,”
which remembers where all information is located on the hard disk. In a multimodule system,
this program resides on the primary module. When a call comes in on a line card, the line card
tells the module, “This is a call for mailbox 569.” Master downloads the information needed to
process the call onto the line card. If a call comes in on the second module for the same mailbox,
the second module sends a message to the first module over the MESA-Link bus. Module 1
sends a copy of the necessary information on mailbox 569 to the second module, also over the
MESA-Link bus. The second module now knows where all the pointers are, and it can set up a
data transfer between the line card in the second module and the common hard disk across the
extended SCSI bus. Master is updated in real-time as changes are made in mailbox parameters
and/or pointers.
This dual-bus operation is in contrast to pure networked systems, which do not have the extended
SCSI bus. The following is an example of a pure networked system: A call comes into the
Module 1 line card port, but the information needed resides in Module 3. The line card port in
Module 1 speaks to the CPU in Module 3. The information is retrieved from the hard disk drive
in Module 3 by its CPU. The information is transmitted back across the local area network to the
CPU in Module 1. The line card in Module 1 pulls the data from the CPU’s RAM in Module 1.
Access to a disk comes through a line card in that module or through the CPU. This type of
design requires multiple databasemanipulation and support.
Centigram’s architecture allows the system to work from a single database. Any line card can
talk directly to any disk in the system to deposit or retrieve digitized speech, without having to
go through a tier of module processors that either buffer the speech,or control each separate disk.
Page55

Primary module intervention is required only when information is added to or deleted from a
hard disk. This makes real-time processing possible even at the highest traffic levels, when all
ports are active at the same time.
Continuous System Operation (CSO) software provides a redundant “hot” standby of all primary
module “master” programs. These programs will reside on the second module and be switched
over as the “active” master programs for the remaining modules if the primary module fails. The
hardware component of CSO is the I/O module which monitors the primary module, and should
a fault be detected, it will move the hardware connections to the back-up module. Hardware
connections include the console, modem, printer, and a datalink switch integration.
0.2

Fault Tolerance

The Model 640 platform has a high degree of fault tolerance when configured with its
Continuous System Operation (CSO) option, Redundant Drive option and’the Alarm Monitor
Power Supplies (AMPS). There is NO single point of system failure in the architecture. The
platform multimodule packaging confines failures to the module level.
A failure affects only a CPU module. With 4 modules composing a 240-port system, only 25%,
or 60 ports maximum, will be put out of service. Even multiple CPU module power failures will
not take out the total system.
A failure of a disk storage module power supply will put its disk module out of service, but with
disk redundancy, the redundant disks-residing in other disk storage module-will
run the
system without loss of functionality or system resources.
Any module has direct access to any disk, including its redundant disk, that resides on a
redundant bus. The Series 6 platform does not require any functionality in adjacent modules.
Most other vendors’ systems require messages to go over a system bus between modules to
access disks that are packaged with line cards. This type of architecture requires at least one other
system bus and processors in both modules to function in order to pass messages between
modules.
The ISA bus is implemented at the CPU module level with up to 15 cards plugged into the
module ISA bus. There is no systemwide bus that all the cards plug into; therefore, there is no
bus failure that can disable all the cards. Many competitors have a systemwide bus that can fail
and disable all cards on that bus, EVEN redundant CPUs.
Two
The MESA-Link bus is redundant and used for CPU-to-CPU communications.
MESA-Link cards plug into each module. The ISA bus in each module is isolated from the
systemwide MESA-Link buses. A MESA-Link card failure will not disable the module in which
the MESA-Link card failed.
The Model 640 platform software does NOT have a single point of system failure that will
disable the entire system. The Continuous System Operation (CSO) option will use the
Page 56

processors in each module as functionally redundant system processors. There will be a
STANDBY copy of all System Resourcetasks on a CPU in another module as a backup to the
CPU of the ACTIVE Primary module. If the Primary module goes out of service, the Continuous
System Operation software will activate the STANDBY system resource tasks for use by all
other line card modules within 5 to 40 seconds. In conjunction with the I/O module, resources
will also move the standby module.
lb.3

Hard Disk Redundancy

Since hard disk drives are electro-mechanical devices, they are more prone to failure than circuit
boards and chips. A drive failure is also the most serious type of system breakdown, since
irreplaceable stored speech and data are lost, rather than simple functionality for the time it takes
to replace the part. For this reason, Centigram offers full hard disk redundancy across the
Series 6 platform.
4
When redundancy is configured, the system writes to both hard disks, one immediately after
another, in a technique called “shadow writing.” To guarantee integrity between the primary and
redundant disks, whenever the VoiceMemo application writes to a redundant disk pair, whether
to store a message or to record a change to the database, both disks must confirm that the task is
finished before the controlling application registers the task as finished. If one of the disks does
not report back to the application, the application will retry the operation. If the retry fails again,
the faulty disk will be put out of service. A deactivated hard drive can be removed from the
drive storage module and a new hard drive inserted while the system continues to process calls.
“Hot” pluggable hard drives enhance the redundancy feature on the Series 6 Model 640.
The Series 6 system recognizes the difference between a primary and a redundant disk, but the
system does not always read from the primary hard disk, even under normal operating
conditions. Both primary and redundant disks are “mirrored” in that they contain the same
information.
Thus, if a traffic queue starts to build up to a primary drive, the system
automatically forms a connection to the secondary drive, processes the call, then shadow-writes
the information back to the primary drive. Redundancy is a cost-effective way to provide
insurance against a fault or a problem in the primary drive _andto improve system throughput in
high-traffic situations.
When the VoiceMemo application encounters bad information on a primary disk, the system
reads the information from the redundant disk immediately. The failure will be unknown to the
system user, and will require no intervention. The system marks the bad sector on the primary
disk, and recopies the information from the redundant disk as a background function, without
interrupting the operation of the system.
In the event of a catastrophic disk crash, the VoiceMemo application transfers immediately to the
redundant disk. When the failed disk is replaced, the system begins the shadow writing process
for all new operations. In addition, the system restores the unduplicated information to the new
disk as an ongoing background function; full redundancy will be restored within a few hours,

Page 57

with no downtime, and no impact on multimode system users. On a single-module system, there
is a maximum of 15 minutes downtime to activate the new hard drive.

13.3

Shared Resource Fax

Beginning with Series 6, FaxMemo resources may be shared across multiple VoiceMemo ports.
Customers do not need to dedicate a FaxMemo resource to a VoiceMemo port. Instead, a
FaxMemo resource can be shared by assigning it to multiple VoiceMemo ports. If a call comes
into one of the ports on the VoiceMemo line group and the caller requests a FaxMemo resource,
the system “switches” the call over to the FaxMemo resource available to that VoiceMemo line
group. If none is available, the caller will be prompted that “All fax lines are busy.” To ensure
the availability of FaxMemo resources, an administrator may dedicate FaxMemo resources to
VoiceMemo ports in a 1:1 ratio. For more information on FaxMemo shared resources, please see
c.
Product Note 2 1.
13.3.1. Shared Resource Fax Configuration

Example

As an example, let’s say a Series 6 Server is going to be used for voice messaging, paging
notification, and fax mail. Voice messaging requires an incoming VoiceMemo port that listens
for dial tone, DTMF and line breaks. In this example, we’ll assign two line ports to the
VoiceMemo inbound line group. Paging notification requires an outgoing port, so we’ll assign
one port to the paging outbound line group. Fax mail requires an inbound port to receive an
incoming fax (when callers send faxes into users’ mailboxes). Fax mail also requires an
outgoing port for users to download their faxes to fax machines. Because Series 6 has FaxMemo
shared resource capability, however, we don’t need to assign two separate ports to fax mail.
Instead, we can assign one fax resource to the FaxMemo line group. The resource in this line
group can be used to perform both incoming and outgoing fax mail functions. How do we do
this? By assigning this FaxMemo group to the VoiceMemo inbound line group, and also to the
paging outbound line group. It now becomes a fax resource for both incoming functions
(accepting fax messages and depositing them in users’ mailboxes) and outgoing functions
(allowing mailbox owners to download their fax messages to fax machines).
Call Flow for Shared Resource Example (Above):
A call flow that maps to this server configuration would be the following. An outside caller,
George, dials a Centigram user’s (Mary’s) telephone number. Mary is not in her office, so the
call is forwarded to voice mail, and George records a message. This function used one port on
the VoiceMemo inbound line group. Mary has paging capabilities in her mailbox, so she is
paged when this new message arrives. This function uses one port on the paging outbound line
group. Mary gets the page, notifying her of a new message, and she dials into her mailbox to
retrieve that message. This function takes one port on the VoiceMemo inbound line group.
A few hours later, George dials Mary’s fax telephone number to leave her a fax. The call is
answered by a port on the VoiceMemo inbound line group. As soon as the port answers the call,

it hearsfax CNG tone and knows to “switch” (over the MVIP bus) the call over to the fax
resourceon the FaxMemo group servicingthat VoiceMemoline group. The fax resourcehears
the CNG tone, sendsCED tone (the tone that establishesthe connectionwith the sendingfax
machine)back, and receivesthe fax from Georgeand depositsit in Mary’s mailbox. Mary is
againpagedbecauseshe has receiveda new message,and shedials into the systemto hear her
new message.This usesa port on the VoiceMemoinboundline group. When Mary downloads
the fax to a fax machine,this usesthe fax resourceon the FaxMemogroup.
If a secondcaller calls into the systemwhile Mary is downloadingthe fax, they will not be able
to leave their fax messagebecausethe one and only fax resourceon the systemis busy. They
will be playeda prompt statingthat “all fax linesare busy.” Becausethere isjust oneresourcein
the FaxMemogroup, it can only serviceone call at a time.
13.3.2. Hardware Rules in Series 6 FaxMemo

1. Rule #1: One or more fax resourcescanbe assignedto FaxMemogroups.
l

System administrators may assign one or more fax resources(available on the
FaxMemoMVIP cards)to a FaxMemogroup.

2. Rule #2: Fax resourcesin a FaxMemogroupcanbe assignedto oneor more line groups.
l

Resourcesin a FaxMemo group can be used by more than one line group. For
example,a resourcein FaxMemo group 1 canbe usedby a port in VoiceMemo line
group 2 that needsto accepta fax message.At the sametime, a secondresourcein
FaxMemo group 1 can be usedby a port in VoiceMemoline group 3 that needsto
accepta personalcoverpage.
If it is necessaryto always guaranteethe availabilityof a fax resource,then the Series
6 server can be configured with an equal number of FaxMemo and VoiceMemo
resources.More specifically,the Series6 serverin this examplecanbe configuredto
have the samenumber of FaxMemo resourcesin line group 1 as there are ports in
VoiceMemoline groups 1 and 2 combined.

3. Rule $3: Fax resourcescan serviceboth inboundandoutboundports.
l

A fax resourcein a FaxMemogroup canbe usedto receivean incoming fax message
(inbound function) and, at a later time, to download a fax from a user’s mailbox
(outboundfunction). It is not necessaryto assigntwo separateFaxMemo groupsto
accomplishboth of thesefunctions.

4. Rule ##4:Just becausea port in a VoiceMemoline group hasa FaxMemoresourceassigned
to it doesnot meanthat it canonly perform FaxMemofunctions.”
l

Even though a port in a VoiceMemo line group may have a FaxMemo resource
assignedto it, that VoiceMemo port may perform any VoiceMemo function. For
Page59

example, the same VoiceMemo port group that is used for telephone answering or
general user access can be used to receive inbound faxes. There is no need to dedicate
VoiceMemo line groups to perform FaxMemo-only functions.
5. Rule #5: Because FaxMemo groups can be assigned to one or more VoiceMemo line groups,
it may be desirable to create multiple inbound port groups, where only one port group has a
FaxMemo group assigned to it.
l

In most FaxMemo installations, it is not required that every line group in the system
have a FaxMemo resource assigned to it. The only time a FaxMemo resource is
absolutely required on an inbound port group is when outside callers will be sending
fax messages. For all other calls, including those that will be retrieving faxes, it is not
necessaryto access the system on a port group that has a FaxMemo resource.
This allows you to size a system where the first, and largest, inbound port group does
not have a FaxMemo group assigned to it, and is used for telephone answering,
general user access, automated attendant, audiotext, fax publishing, etc. If a mailbox
owner has the fax mail FCOS and they access their mailbox from this port group, they
can perform all fax capabilities, with the exception of “Making” a fax message,
“Retrieving” a fax message ONLINE, and inputting a personal cover page into their
mailbox (the three user capabilities that actually require an inbound FaxMemo
resource). Because they are on a VoiceMemo line group that does not have a
FaxMemo resource assigned to it, the system will not prompt them or give them the
capability to perform these functions. They can still retrieve their fax messages by
redirecting them to a fax machine or a PC equipped with a fax modem.
The second inbound port group can have a FaxMemo group servicing it, and be
accessedonly by outside callers sending faxes, or by some mailbox owners you want
to give the capability to “Make” fax messages or “Retrieve” fax messages online, or
to input a personal fax cover page.
The last line group is outbound and serviced by a FaxMemo group (this could be the
same FaxMemo group that services the second inbound port group). This port group
.delivers retrieved faxes and performs any other -outbound functions such as Paging,
Call Placement, and Auto Wake-Up. In this configuration, the call flow for Fax mail
would be as follows:
a) Outside caller accessesuser’s mailbox and deposits fax message over inbound
line group (second line group) that has the FaxMemo group servicing it.
b) Mailbox owner accessestheir mailbox over inbound line group (the first line
group) that does not have the assigned FaxMemo group, and retrieves fax
messages by sending them to their default fax number, by inputting a fax
number, or by retrieving all unplayed faxes to their default fax number.
c) The system queues up the fax delivery requests on the outbound line group
(serviced by the FaxMemo group) to be delivered as soon as there is an
available resource.

6. Rule #6: Voice ports that send or receive faxes must have accessto a fax resource.
l

To perform a FaxMemo function over a VoiceMemo inbound port, that VoiceMemo
port must have access to a fax resource. If no resource is available at the time of the
request, a prompt will be played, stating that “All fax lines are busy.” If a fax
resource is not available on an outbound port, then the request will be queued until a
fax resource becomes available.

Page 6 1

APPENDIX I: Class of Service Descriptions
FCOS Feature Bits by Category
Catepory 1: Greetiw Features
Ignore dual tone multiple frequencies (DTMFs) during greeting
060
062
Hang up immediately after greeting
063
Call mailbox attendant after greeting
064
Call mailbox user extension after greeting
Play system time after greeting
065
Conditional greetings
161
162
General greetings
224
Auto-transfer to task before greeting
c.

Cateporv 2: LoPin Features
Login to mailbox
001
016
Deny recycling with * key
066
Login during greeting in greet-only mailbox
Passcode required for mobile DID
069
Only one correct passcode for login
081
Deny change of passcode in first tutorial
093
101
Deny login on line group 1
Deny login on line group 2
102
103
Deny login on line group 3
104
Deny login on line group 4
Deny login on line group 5
105
106
Deny login on line group 6
Deny
login on line group 7
107
Deny login on line group 8
108
109
Deny login on line group 9
130
Passcode cannot be same as mailbox
Bad passcode lockout if over limit
132
151
Deny 333 access for mobile DID
152
Deny login within tree
Deny login after greeting
’
156
Caller must enter linegroup accesscode
160
165
Pound Key (#) login
218
Passcode NOT needed on direct calls
219
Login with 0 using cut-through paging
225
Auto-transfer to task upon login

Page 62

Categorv 3: J,opout Features
003
009
170
220

Q&gory
002
098
159

Return to welcome prompt
Automatic logout if no unplayed messages
Transfer to Voice Gateway
No dial extension, e-mail, or Voice Gateway if unplayed messages

4: Attendant Call Features
Transfer to mailbox attendant
Say “Press 0” to caller before beep
Say “Press 0 to return to receptionist”

Categorv 5: Outstde Caller FeaturB
002
Transfer to mailbox attendant
004
Outside caller functions
Play outside caller menu prompts
005
017
Fast line release from outside caller
041
Receive messages from outside callers
051
Do not switch language for outside callers
092
User will be in Dial-by-Name database
Say “Press 0” to caller before beep
098
111
Deny message receipt on line group 1
Deny message receipt on line group 2
112
113
Deny message receipt on line group 3
114
Deny message receipt on line group 4
115
Deny message receipt on line group 5
Deny message receipt on line group 6
116
117
Deny message receipt on line group 7
118
Deny message receipt on line group 8
Deny message receipt on line group 9
119
137
Caller must enter access code
Say
“Press # for more options” to callers
176
203
Walkaway fax for callers
221
Deny caller transfer to e-mail/Voice Gateway

Page 63

051
082
083
097
098
131
133
136
138
140
146
157
159
176
202
208
209
210
211
242
247

Do not switch language for outside callers
Soft play (interrupt) message count
Soft play (interrupt) most prompts
Do not say “I will ring “ in AR
Say “Press 0” to caller before beep
Don’t say limits of liability statement
Don’t say: “You may start your message now”
Don’t say: “End of message”
Don’t say: “Message complete”
Say full date when playing messages
Don’t say “VoiceMemo storage is full”
Repeat message for answering machine
Say “Press 0 to return to receptionist”
Say “Press # for more options” to callers
Do not play mailbox name or extension number
Play reorder tone after cut-through paging or greet-only
Tone Only Pager mailbox interface
Numeric Display Pager mailbox interface
Voice Pager mailbox interface
Say variable passcodeprompts for business guest mailboxes
Don’t play any prompt to fax call placement recipient

Page 64

Category 7: Receive Messaes Feam
Notification tone when new message arrives
039
040
Receive messagesfrom other users
Receive messagesfrom outside callers
041
042
Receive messagesfrom Telephone Answering Service (TAS) operator
Receive message of the day
043
Receive user distribution list messages
044
Receive master distribution list messages
045
Announce receipt count at login
046
Notification prompt when new message arrives
047
088
Receive urgent messages
Deny message receipt on line group 1
111
112
Deny message receipt on line group 2
Deny message receipt on line group 3
113
114
Deny messagereceipt on line group 4
115
Deny messagereceipt on line group 5
Deny messagereceipt on line group 6
116
117
Deny message receipt on line group 7
Deny message receipt on line group 8
118
Deny messagereceipt on line group 9
119
127
Deny receipt of messagesbefore tutorial run
Receive Cut-through Page notify receipt
173
Receive broadcast greeting
175
Receive broadcast name
179
185
Receive Wakeup Call notification receipt
Receive fax messages
190
Receive fax messagesonly
198
Auto-receipt for fax send
199
Delay requestedreceipt for 24 hours
223

Page 65

CatePorv8: Plav MessagesFeatura
Rewind andfast-forward during playback
006
007
Pausein record or play
Notification tone when new messagearrives
039
Announcereceiptcount at login
046
Notification prompt when new messagearrives
047
048
No auto-timestampof unplayedmessages
No auto-timestampof playedmessages
049
050
Play messages
Auto-play unplayedmessages
052
Play savedmessagesin first in, first out (FIFO) order
057
Play unsavedmessagesin FIFO order
058
Play unplayedmessagesfirst
059
Audit receiptmessage
075
Play urgent messagesin FIFO order
076
Auto-play all messages(new andsaved)
089
144
Skip forward to next message
Messagestaysin original queue
145
147
Sendreceiptafter full play
Don’t
jump to new messagefrom savedqueue
153
204
Messageskip, forward and backward
Don’t auto-playfirst message(w/auto-play)
215
Play receiptsafter urgentmessages
216
Announcetext messageswithout count
217
Deletemailbox without unplayedmessages
255

Q&~ory 9: Answer MessagesFeatures
029
Answer messages
Answer andmark urgent
019
030
Answer andrequestreceipt
031
Answer and mark confidential
Attach original messageto answer
038
147
Sendreceiptafter full play
Continue
sendingmessage(* key)
158

Page 66

Category 10: KeepLRiscard Messages Pea%Keep messages
053
Auto-keep messages
054
Discard messages
055
Auto-discard messages
056
Message stays in original queue
145
Undelete last message with * key
227

Category 11: MakeMessages
Features
020
Make messages
Make and request receipt
021
022
Make to multiple destinations
Make and mark confidential
023
Make to user distribution list
032
Make to master distribution list
034
Wait to record (timeout = # key)
061
Make and mark urgent
087
User will be in Dial-by-Name database
092
Make messages before keep/discard
096
Make/Give to telephone number
110
Make/Give to mailbox with empty GCOS
126
Repeat message for answering machine
157
Continue sending message (* key)
158
Message wait 1, Pager requeue
168
Message wait 2, Pager requeue
169
171
Cut-through paging
Cut-through paging and messaging
172
Append # at the end of Cut-through page
188
Make fax messages
191

Page 67

Cateporv 12: Give Messages Features
Give messages
024
:
086
Give receipt message
Give
and
mark
urgent
018
025
Give and request receipt
Give to multiple destinations
026
027
Give and mark confidential
Give with comments
028
Give to user distribution list
033
Give to master distribution list
035
061
Wait to record (timeout = # key)
Give receipt message with comments
084
085
Give receipt message to multiple destinations
110
Make/Give to telephone number
Make/Give to mailbox with empty GCOS
126
Repeat message for answering machine
157
158
Continue sending message (* key)
192
Give fax messages

Cateporv 13:
018
019
021
023
025
027
030
031
087
095

Messape Addressinp Features
Give and mark urgent
Answer and mark urgent
Make and request receipt
Make and mark confidential
Give and request receipt
Give and mark confidential
Answer and request receipt
Answer and mark confidential
Make and mark urgent
Mark message for future delivery

Page 68

CateF0i-v 14: User Options
070
015
071
072
073
074
077
078
093
094
095
124
125
127
142
143
148
180
195
196
201
249

User options menu
Change wakeup options
Record or change mailbox name
Record or change mailbox greeting
Enter and change mailbox passcode
Create or modify user distribution list
Change pager schedule
Activate user tutorial
Deny change of passcode in first tutorial
Change message delivery options
Mark message for future delivery
Change paging phone number
Clear user passcode
Deny receipt of messages before tutorial run
Must run tutorial from own phone (SMDI)
Change message delivery phone number
Change auto-wakeup phone number
Record personal wakeup message
Specify fax delivery number
Change default fax number
Deny trivial passcode
Allow transfer to help desk during tutorial

&Qgory

15: User Distribution List Features
032
Make to user distribution list
033
Give to user distribution list
036
Auto-receipt for user distribution list messages
044
Receive user distribution list messages
*.
074
Create or modify user distribution list
134
Broadcast message waiting status
222
Disallow nesting of distribution list

Cateporv 16: Master Distribution Lists Features
034
035
045

Make to master distribution list
Give to master distribution list
Receive master distribution list messages

Page 69

ory

008
090
091

17: Check In/Check Out Features
Mailbox can be checked in/out
Check in other mailboxes
Check out other mailboxes

Cateporv 18: Special Function Mailboxes
121
Define Tree mailbox
Define Broadcast mailbox
122
Family Head
128
Host mailbox
129
Define Rotational mailbox
068
Default to fust child of tree mailbox
120
Announce broadcast mailbox name
123
Define Chain mailbox in Receptionist
141
Send receipt after full play
147
Deny login within tree
152
174
Define Broadcast Greeting mailbox
Define Broadcast Name mailbox
178
Default to last child of tree mailbox
186
Receptionist call-transfer tree mailbox
187
Rotate on full mailbox
189
Play names of list 1 children
229

Category 19: Message Waiting Livht Features

079
080
134
182
183
205
228
234

Set message waiting #l for urgent messages only
Set messagewaiting #2 for urgent messages only
Broadcast message waiting status
Use primary/alternate as week/weekend for message waiting indication (MWI) 1
Use primary/alternate as week/weekend for MWI 2
Do not use text count for message waiting
Set messagewaiting #3 for urgent messages only
Check message wait status of children

Page 70

morv
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
203
206
207
230
235
236
237
238
239
240
247
256

20:

Fax Features
Receive fax messages
Make fax messages
Give fax messages
Deliver fax to default number
Deliver fax online
Specify fax delivery number
Change default fax number
Fax-on-demand for Greeting Only mailbox
Receive fax messagesonly
Auto-receipt for fax send
Personal fax cover page
Walkaway fax for callers
Discard fax message after delivery
Fax Verify (sending system not self)
Deny change of fax cover page options
Display FROM filed on fax cover page
Display promotional message on fax cover page
Automatically deliver fax message to default number
End-of-session multiple fax delivery
Retrieve all unplayed faxes through user options
Receive fax on voice recording timeout
No fax call placement prompts
Play abbreviated prompt before greeting

Page 7 1

CatePorv 2 1: PapMessaPe Delivers Features
Change pager schedule
077
124
Change paging phone number
Message wait 1, Pager requeue
168
169
Message wait 2, Pager requeue
171
Cut-through paging (0)
172
Cut-through paging and messaging
Receive cut-through page notify receipt
173
181
Paging over message delivery, MWI 1 over MWI 2
Append # to end of cut-through page number
188
208
Play reorder tone after cut-&rough-page or greet-only
209
Tone Only Pager mailbox interface
Numeric Display Pager mailbox interface
210
211
Voice Pager mailbox interface
Send page upon answer, greet-only mailbox
212
213
Edit CTP number with * key if no caller menu
219
Login with 0 using cut-through paging

Cateeorv 22:
154
170
184
205
217
220
221
224
225
226

E-mail. Text. and “OneCall” Features
Announce text (e-mail) message count
Can transfer to Voice Gateway (VG) system
Append mailbox number to VG transfer
Do not use text count for message waiting
Announce text messages without count
No dial extension, e-mail, or VG if unplayed messages
Deny caller transfer to e-mail/VG
Auto-transfer to task before greeting
Auto-transfer to task upon login
Auto-transfer to task after unplayed messages _

Page 72

_ _. . -

Q&JOIV

135
139
149
166
231
232
241

23: Network & Voice Fom
Define template mailbox (MESA-Forms)
Template: assume last greet mailbox FCOS
Login to template through rotational mailbox
AMIS Analog networking
Passcode Broadcast mailbox
Allow receipt of passcode broadcasts
Suppress broadcast forced receipt

Category 24: OneView
250
251
252

Allow OneView login
Allow OneView telephone playback/record
Allow OneView client to change mailbox ID

Page 73

Limits Class of Service (LCOS) Parameters
Log-In
Log-In Sessions Per Period
Billing Period
Speech Recording
Name Speech Length
User Message Length
Outside Caller Message Length
Greeting Length
Network Message Length
Call Placement Message Length
Distribution List
Number of Lists Per Mailbox
Number of Members Per List
Messages
Number of Messages Per Mailbox
Number of Messages Per Billing Period
Outdialing
Maximum Digits Allowed
Call Placement
Message Delivery
Maximum Pages in Billing Period
Auto Wake-Up
Paging
Fax Retrieval

Fax Limits
Number of Fax Messages Per Mailbox
Maximum Digits for Fax Message Delivery

Purge Schedules
Unplayed Voice Message Retention
Played Voice Message Retention
Urgent Voice Message Retention
Voice Receipt Retention
Page Receipt Retention
Unplayed Fax Message Retention
Played Fax Message Retention
Urgent Fax Message Retention
Fax Receipt Retention
Paging/Message Delivery
Number of Retry Attempts for Alternate
Time Interval for Alternates
Miscellaneous
Future Delivery
Maximum Attachments on “Give”
Maximum Attachments on Network
Prompts
American English (Mnemonic)
Canadian French
Danish
German
Japanese
Korean
Mandarin
Portuguese
Australian Enclish
New Zealand English
British English
Latin American Spanish
Mexican Spanish
Argentinean Spanish

Page 74

Network Class of Service (NCOS) Capabilities
l

Access a GCOS across the network

Make a network message

Make an urgent network message

Give a network message

Give an urgent network message

Answer a network message

Answer an urgent network message

Receive automatic receipts for network messages

Receive a network message

Receive an “Urgent” network message

Limit the number of network message attachments

Broadcast a change of name and/or greeting across the network

Make a network fax message

Give a network fax message

Answer a network fax message

Pase 75

APPENDIX

II: Line Card Exceptions

Timeout Parameters:
#l

Start record no speech time
This parameter sets the maximum amount of time VoiceMemo waits for speech after
issuing the “beep” that prompts a caller or system user to record a message or.
greeting. If no speech is detected, VoiceMemo terminates the record sequence and
issues the prompt “Nothing recorded.”

Stop record timeout
This parameter specifies the maximum interval of continuous silence allowed during
the recording of a message or greeting. Silence intervals that are less than the stop
record timeout are interpreted as pauses; once the stop record theout is exceeded,
VoiceMemo terminates recording and plays the prompt “End of message.”

Ringing timeout
The ringing timeout defines the time period that must elapse after the line card detects
ringing before a call is treated as a “Ring/No Answer.”

#35

Sleep after hang up
After VoiceMemo goes onhook, it ignores a ringing event for the amount of time set
by this parameter. This timeout ensures that the system is ready to issue the proper
greeting when it answers the next call.

#38

Centrex time out.
Each Centrex call comes in as a ring on the telephone line, and a data packet on an
RS232 connection. Among other items, the data package contains the information
necessary for VoiceMemo to answer the call with a user’s personal greeting. If
ringing occurs first, and a data package is not received before the Centrex tirne out
expires, VoiceMemo plays the general message center greeting. If the data packet is
received first, and no ringing occurs before the Centrex time out takes effect, the
system invalidates the data packet and waits for a new call.

#138

No break time after flash
After performing a switchhook flash, VoiceMemo ignores all line break events for the
duration set by this parameter. This prevents a disconnect following a switchhook
flash.

Page 76

# 140

No break/ring time on loop
No break/ring time on loop is used only when a line card channel is jumpered for loop
current. After a hang up or pulse,out command, VoiceMemo ignores line break and
ringing events for the time specified by this parameter. Line exception 35 mus t be
disabled for this line exception to be valid.

#142

Inhibit play time
After a port answers a call, VoiceMemo pauses for the time specified by this line
exception before playing the greeting or first prompt. The Inhibit play time is
adjusted if callers are not hearing the first part of a greeting, or if callers are waiting
too long before the greeting begins.

# 180

Play delay after DTMF detect
This parameter specifies the time VoiceMemo waits after detecting DTMF before
playing a prompt, greeting, or message. Some telephone systems mute the talk path
after a DTMF key is pressed; the Play delay after DTMF detect can be increased to
prevent these systems from clipping off the beginning of speech after DTMF.

182

Ringback tone maximum silence
This line exception specifies the maximum silence allowed between ringback tone
cycles before a greet command terminates automatically with a speech detect event.

Incomiw

SiPnal Detection:

ff3

Dial tone detect time

#22

Start dial tone timeout

# 136 Minimum dial tone detect power
These three parameters, plus signal duration, set the criteria VoiceMemo uses to
determine if a signal it is receiving is a valid dial tone.
- #128

Minimum busy half cycle (greet)

#174

Minimum busy detection time

#175

Maximum busy detection time
The line card uses the values set for these line exceptions, collectively, to determine if
it is receiving a busy tone. When the greet command is active, a different minimum
busy half cycle value (parameter #129) is used.

Page 77

#172

Minimum reorder detection time

#173

Maximum reorder detection time
_i
The line card uses the values set for these line exceptions, together with the minimum
busy half cycle (greet) to determine if it is receiving a reorder tone. When the greet
command is active, a different minimum busy half cycle value (parameter #129) is
used.

# 130 TIE trunk break detect time
When a port is jumpered for E&M interface, an M lead break greater than the time
specified by this parameter is considered a disconnect.
#13 1 Loop break detect time
When a port is jumpered for loop current, if the PBX breaks the loop for an interval
greater than the time specified by this parameter, VoiceMemo Considers the break a
disconnect, and goes onhook.
# 132 M-lead debounce time
M-lead state changes must last longer than this time to be considered valid.
#133

Delay before wink
After a valid incoming seizure, the port waits this amount of time before sending the
wink start signal.

#134

In-ring on time high

#144

In-ring off time

#148

In-ring on time low

#150

In-ring maximum power

Page 78

# 152 In-ring minimum power
The line card port uses these parameters for incoming ringing detection.
l

Incoming ringing bursts must be at least as long as the in-ring on-time low
value, and less than the In ring on time high value.
There must be an interval between ringing bursts that is at least as long as the
in-ring off-time value.
Incoming ringing power must be above the in-ring maximum power threshold
to be detected.
When incoming ringing power falls below the in-ring minimum threshold,
ringing detection is cleared.
r.

Output Signaline Adiustments;
# 14

Pulse per second
This line exception defines the pulse per second rate for dial pulses VoiceMemo
outdials.

#23

Flashhook time
This is the number of hundredths of a second that VoiceMemo remains onhook
during flash while transferring a call.

#24

Wink start
Wink start is a type of out-signaling capability that usually is required by the central
office for DID applications. Certain PBXs also may require wink start signaling on
E&M tie trunk connections. The default for this parameter is disabled.

#154

Pulse out interdigit delay
This is the amount of time a port waits between accepting a pulse output command
and starting the pulse output of digits.

#164

DTMF output duration
This is the length, in hundredths of a second, of each DTMF tone VoiceMemo
outdials.

#166

DTMF interdigit delay
This is the amount of silence, in hundredths of a second, between each DTMF tone
VoiceMemo outdials.

# 176 DTMF output level
This sets the amplitude of DTMF tone output.

Page 79

DTMF Detection:
#6

DTMF detect enabled/disabled
This parameter is used to selectively disable or enable DTMF detection on line card
ports. DTMF detection normally is enabled; it may be disabled to prevent callers OHP
certain ports from logging into mailboxes, for example.

#25

Enable DTMF Co1 3
This line exception enables fourth column DTMF tones (A, B, C, D). Default is
disabled.

#32

DTMF receive debounce time
The DTMF receive debounce time specifies the amount of time apTMF key must be
depressed before it is recognized as a valid VoiceMemo command. This line
exception is active except when playing or recording a message.

#33

Record DTMF receive debounce
The Record DTMF receive debounce time stipulates how long a DTMF key must be
depressed during the recording of a message for the system to recognize the tone as
DTMF. The value of this line exception is set higher than line exception 32, which
means the DTMF key must be pressed slightly longer during the recording of
messagesthan at other times. Since higher voices often have components that can be
mistaken for DTMF tones, but these components are usually of short duration, this
parameter can prevent false DTMF detection.

#34

Play DTMF receive debounce
This parameter determines how long a DTMF key must be depressed during the
playing of a message for the system to recognize tone as DTMF input. Like the
Record DTMF receive debounce time, the value of this line exception is set higher
than line exception 32. This prevents VoiceMemo from mistaking high voice
frequencies for DTMF when messages are played.

Greet Command Parameters:
#8

Dead line timeout
Dead line timeout sets the number of seconds VoiceMemo waits for ringing, busy
tone, or speech after issuing a greeting. Silence intervals greater than the dead line
timeout value are interpreted as a dead line or disconnect.

Page80

#128

Minimum busy half cycle (greet)
When the greet command is active, the line card uses the minimum busy half cycle
(greet), together with line exceptions 174 (minimum busy detection time) and #175
(maximum busy detection time) to determine if a signal it is receiving is a busy tone.
This parameter also is used with parameters 172 (minimum reorder detection time)
and 173 (maximum reorder detection time) to detect reorder tone while the greet
command is active.

#lO

Silence timeout

#ll

Speak timeout

#146

Speech detect minimum time

#170

9
Speechdetect minimum power (greet)
The line card uses these parameters, together with a characteristic called absolute
steadiness,to detect speech.
l

#182
-

The speech or energy burst received by the line card must have a duration that
falls between the values set by parameters #146 and #l 1, and have at least as
much energy as the value of parameter #170.
The speech or energy burst must be followed by a minimum amount of
(This is how the line card
silence, as specified by parameter #lo.
differentiates multiple bursts from a single long burst of energy or speech.)
If the signal received meets these criteria, the greet software measures the
absolute steadiness, or the ratio of minimum energy to maximum energy of
the signal, to differentiate between a call progress tone and speech. Gall
progress tones have steady energy throughout the speech detect interval;
speech has extremely variable energy.

Ringback tone maximum silence
This line exception specifies the maximum silence allowed between ringback tone
cycles before a greet command terminates automatically with a speech detect event.

SDeech and Silence Detection Duriw
#160

Recordinz

Silence delay
This is the maximum amount of silence, specified in frames, needed to detect a pause.

# 161 Minimum miniframes not silent
This is the minimum number of minil?arnes used to reactivate recording after a pause
is detected.
Page81

# 162

Minimum speech frames
This is the minimum number of consecutive frames of speech (as determined by
#163) required to set the recording timeout. The Minimum Speech Frames parameter
prevents recording from stopping after it has started.

# 163

Minimum miniframes speech
This is the minimum number of miniframes of speech needed to determine that an
entire frame contains speech. This parameter also prevents recording from stopping
after it has started,

PromDt and MessarJe Outmt
#I4

Controls:

r.
Pause compression enable
VoiceMemo line cards normally compress intervals of silence, to eliminate pauses in
speech before sending messages to the hard disk for storage. In addition to saving
disk storage space, pause compression usually improves the quality of message
playback. This feature may be disabled, if necessary.

#13

Enable AGC
Automatic Gain Control (AGC) adjusts weak and strong signals to keep the output
level of speech constant. This means callers and system users do not hear wide
variations in the loudness and softness of greetings, prompts, and messages played to
them.

#178

Record prompt output level
This controls the amplitude of the “beep” that is issued before allowing the recording
of a message or greeting. The record prompt also is affected by # 156 Record prompt
duration, which controls the length of the record prompt signal, and #158 Record
prompt frequency, which specifies the frequency, in hertz, of the record prompt beep.

New Line ExceDtions-Sumorted

bv 5.02B and 5.03B:

~9200 Background power lower limit
The default is 10. Background power noise levels below this limit are not recorded.
#2 14 DTMF detect minimum power ratio
The default is 16. Ratio of noise power just before DTMF to power during DTMF
must be above this value before DTMF events are sent to the module while in record
mode. This ratio adapts upward during recording if a high signal to noise ratio is
found. The line exception value corresponds to internal power detectors, and thus is
not directly related to dB.

Page 82

APPENDIX

III:

Line Card Interfkes

The following line card interfaces are supported by the platform:
l

Loop start-The
Ground start-The
cards.
DID-The

loop start interface is with 4/8-port loop start line cards.
ground start interface is provided with 4/8-port ground start line

DID/E&M

interface is provided with 4/8-port loop DID line cards.

2-wire E&M-This
interface is provided with DID/E&M
Types I & V are supported.

line cards. Both E&M

Tl-The platform supports direct digital connections to Tl (North America) and, the
Tl interfaces emulate loop-start, ground start, DID, and E&M.protocols.
El-Direct

digital El connectivity is supported on the Series 6 platform using SS7
integrationprotocal. Futures will support ESDI, Rl, and R.2 protocals.

A power/configuration card is required when analog DID/E&M or groundstart line
interfaces are employed. This card provides -48V to the line interface circuits on these
cards. One power/configuration card serves up to four 4/8-port analog line cards.

Page 83

1 VoiceMemo
Configuration
MainMenu

3 Mailboxes

Main Menu
.

Mailbox~;;tanancs

List M;rtanance
II
0

Search Pattern Menu

tem$;tena3RdRL
I

System Configuration

4 010VoiceMemo
Application
2 VoiceMemo
Application
VoiceMemo Configuration
Main Menu
VoiceMemo Configuration
Clffline Menu

Line Groups Menu
(Define Line & Fax Groups)

I
II

Line Grnups Menu

Linegrnup Only
Applications Menu

(E) or F)-l

(
A&Gather

(El or (V-1

Digit Manipulation
Menu

I
(M)

VoiceMemo Modify
Application
II I

61
Lt

I
.I

(data enby parameters)
Day/Night Menu

Dial String and
Mailbox Menu

Passccde Menu
(or FP,SA Menu)

Receptionist Menu

--?

Dialing Plan Menu
(and Star Prefix Dplan)

Dial-by:Name

--A

Other DID
Features Menu

VoiceMemo Configuration
Online Menu

II II

DID VoiceMemo Menu
Monthly Gather Menu

VoiceMemo Configuration
Online Menu

Analog Networking Configuration
Menu

Mailbox on Demand
Menu

(data entry parameters)

5 PaperApplication

8 HardlliskUtilities
Main Menu
System Maintenance
Menu
Hard Disk Utilities Menu

SCSI Shutdown Menu

Define Pagers Menu

-=i

(Pager systems supported)

Kedundancy Update
Menu

Billing3 Reports

RS432Message
LightsApplication
ceMemo Configuration
Main Menu

L
-P

RS232 Programmable
Menu

!I
I

(data entry parameters)

7 ltTMF4o-PtM
Message
Lights
Application

2ei
(other reports)

18 Phoneline
Exceptions
Main Menu

ksh

._ ::
...___
..a

11 FGOS,6COS,LCOS,RCOS,NCOS
andTCOS
12 System
Maintenance

Main Menu

System Maintenance
Menu
System Configuration
Menu

Feature Class of
Service Menu

QL
I

Auto. Receptionist
Extensions Menu

Even More Limits
Parameters Menu

cp, i

FaxMemo Limits
Menu

Network Menu

FF+&-&/j

RCOS Selected Menu

-4

Console ! Serial Port Setup
Menu

-4

r
Alans

Maintenance Menu

NPA/NXX Menu

I“i’

Network Class of
Service Menu

I
r

Tenant Class of
Service lvbu

System Configuration
Menu

Oflline Menu

R
kL

Time and Date Menu
Utility Menu

I
I
I

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.4
Linearized                      : No
Page Count                      : 329
Page Mode                       : UseOutlines
Page Layout                     : SinglePage
Mod Date                        : 2002:01:05 02:05:17-06:00
Creation Date                   : 2000:03:20 08:20:24-08:00
Producer                        : Acrobat 4.0 Scan Plug-in for Windows
Author                          : EZ Manuals
Modify Date                     : 2002:01:05 02:05:17-06:00
Create Date                     : 2000:03:20 08:20:24-08:00
Metadata Date                   : 2002:01:05 02:05:17-06:00
Creator                         : EZ Manuals

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

PDF Mitel Mail Fax Memo

Mitel Mail Fax Memo R2 Mitel Mail Fax Memo R2

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation